reload.c revision 146906
1/* Search an insn for pseudo regs that must be in hard regs and are not.
2   Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
3   1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4
5This file is part of GCC.
6
7GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
8the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
9Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
10version.
11
12GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
13WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
14FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License
15for more details.
16
17You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
18along with GCC; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free
19Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
2002111-1307, USA.  */
21
22/* This file contains subroutines used only from the file reload1.c.
23   It knows how to scan one insn for operands and values
24   that need to be copied into registers to make valid code.
25   It also finds other operands and values which are valid
26   but for which equivalent values in registers exist and
27   ought to be used instead.
28
29   Before processing the first insn of the function, call `init_reload'.
30
31   To scan an insn, call `find_reloads'.  This does two things:
32   1. sets up tables describing which values must be reloaded
33   for this insn, and what kind of hard regs they must be reloaded into;
34   2. optionally record the locations where those values appear in
35   the data, so they can be replaced properly later.
36   This is done only if the second arg to `find_reloads' is nonzero.
37
38   The third arg to `find_reloads' specifies the number of levels
39   of indirect addressing supported by the machine.  If it is zero,
40   indirect addressing is not valid.  If it is one, (MEM (REG n))
41   is valid even if (REG n) did not get a hard register; if it is two,
42   (MEM (MEM (REG n))) is also valid even if (REG n) did not get a
43   hard register, and similarly for higher values.
44
45   Then you must choose the hard regs to reload those pseudo regs into,
46   and generate appropriate load insns before this insn and perhaps
47   also store insns after this insn.  Set up the array `reload_reg_rtx'
48   to contain the REG rtx's for the registers you used.  In some
49   cases `find_reloads' will return a nonzero value in `reload_reg_rtx'
50   for certain reloads.  Then that tells you which register to use,
51   so you do not need to allocate one.  But you still do need to add extra
52   instructions to copy the value into and out of that register.
53
54   Finally you must call `subst_reloads' to substitute the reload reg rtx's
55   into the locations already recorded.
56
57NOTE SIDE EFFECTS:
58
59   find_reloads can alter the operands of the instruction it is called on.
60
61   1. Two operands of any sort may be interchanged, if they are in a
62   commutative instruction.
63   This happens only if find_reloads thinks the instruction will compile
64   better that way.
65
66   2. Pseudo-registers that are equivalent to constants are replaced
67   with those constants if they are not in hard registers.
68
691 happens every time find_reloads is called.
702 happens only when REPLACE is 1, which is only when
71actually doing the reloads, not when just counting them.
72
73Using a reload register for several reloads in one insn:
74
75When an insn has reloads, it is considered as having three parts:
76the input reloads, the insn itself after reloading, and the output reloads.
77Reloads of values used in memory addresses are often needed for only one part.
78
79When this is so, reload_when_needed records which part needs the reload.
80Two reloads for different parts of the insn can share the same reload
81register.
82
83When a reload is used for addresses in multiple parts, or when it is
84an ordinary operand, it is classified as RELOAD_OTHER, and cannot share
85a register with any other reload.  */
86
87#define REG_OK_STRICT
88
89#include "config.h"
90#include "system.h"
91#include "coretypes.h"
92#include "tm.h"
93#include "rtl.h"
94#include "tm_p.h"
95#include "insn-config.h"
96#include "expr.h"
97#include "optabs.h"
98#include "recog.h"
99#include "reload.h"
100#include "regs.h"
101#include "hard-reg-set.h"
102#include "flags.h"
103#include "real.h"
104#include "output.h"
105#include "function.h"
106#include "toplev.h"
107#include "params.h"
108
109#ifndef REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
110#define REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P(REGNO, MODE) REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO)
111#endif
112
113#ifndef REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
114#define REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P(REGNO, MODE) REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO)
115#endif
116
117/* All reloads of the current insn are recorded here.  See reload.h for
118   comments.  */
119int n_reloads;
120struct reload rld[MAX_RELOADS];
121
122/* All the "earlyclobber" operands of the current insn
123   are recorded here.  */
124int n_earlyclobbers;
125rtx reload_earlyclobbers[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
126
127int reload_n_operands;
128
129/* Replacing reloads.
130
131   If `replace_reloads' is nonzero, then as each reload is recorded
132   an entry is made for it in the table `replacements'.
133   Then later `subst_reloads' can look through that table and
134   perform all the replacements needed.  */
135
136/* Nonzero means record the places to replace.  */
137static int replace_reloads;
138
139/* Each replacement is recorded with a structure like this.  */
140struct replacement
141{
142  rtx *where;			/* Location to store in */
143  rtx *subreg_loc;		/* Location of SUBREG if WHERE is inside
144				   a SUBREG; 0 otherwise.  */
145  int what;			/* which reload this is for */
146  enum machine_mode mode;	/* mode it must have */
147};
148
149static struct replacement replacements[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS * ((MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS * 2) + 1)];
150
151/* Number of replacements currently recorded.  */
152static int n_replacements;
153
154/* Used to track what is modified by an operand.  */
155struct decomposition
156{
157  int reg_flag;		/* Nonzero if referencing a register.  */
158  int safe;		/* Nonzero if this can't conflict with anything.  */
159  rtx base;		/* Base address for MEM.  */
160  HOST_WIDE_INT start;	/* Starting offset or register number.  */
161  HOST_WIDE_INT end;	/* Ending offset or register number.  */
162};
163
164#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
165
166/* Save MEMs needed to copy from one class of registers to another.  One MEM
167   is used per mode, but normally only one or two modes are ever used.
168
169   We keep two versions, before and after register elimination.  The one
170   after register elimination is record separately for each operand.  This
171   is done in case the address is not valid to be sure that we separately
172   reload each.  */
173
174static rtx secondary_memlocs[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
175static rtx secondary_memlocs_elim[NUM_MACHINE_MODES][MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
176static int secondary_memlocs_elim_used = 0;
177#endif
178
179/* The instruction we are doing reloads for;
180   so we can test whether a register dies in it.  */
181static rtx this_insn;
182
183/* Nonzero if this instruction is a user-specified asm with operands.  */
184static int this_insn_is_asm;
185
186/* If hard_regs_live_known is nonzero,
187   we can tell which hard regs are currently live,
188   at least enough to succeed in choosing dummy reloads.  */
189static int hard_regs_live_known;
190
191/* Indexed by hard reg number,
192   element is nonnegative if hard reg has been spilled.
193   This vector is passed to `find_reloads' as an argument
194   and is not changed here.  */
195static short *static_reload_reg_p;
196
197/* Set to 1 in subst_reg_equivs if it changes anything.  */
198static int subst_reg_equivs_changed;
199
200/* On return from push_reload, holds the reload-number for the OUT
201   operand, which can be different for that from the input operand.  */
202static int output_reloadnum;
203
204  /* Compare two RTX's.  */
205#define MATCHES(x, y) \
206 (x == y || (x != 0 && (GET_CODE (x) == REG				\
207			? GET_CODE (y) == REG && REGNO (x) == REGNO (y)	\
208			: rtx_equal_p (x, y) && ! side_effects_p (x))))
209
210  /* Indicates if two reloads purposes are for similar enough things that we
211     can merge their reloads.  */
212#define MERGABLE_RELOADS(when1, when2, op1, op2) \
213  ((when1) == RELOAD_OTHER || (when2) == RELOAD_OTHER	\
214   || ((when1) == (when2) && (op1) == (op2))		\
215   || ((when1) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT && (when2) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT) \
216   || ((when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS		\
217       && (when2) == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS)	\
218   || ((when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS		\
219       && (when2) == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS))
220
221  /* Nonzero if these two reload purposes produce RELOAD_OTHER when merged.  */
222#define MERGE_TO_OTHER(when1, when2, op1, op2) \
223  ((when1) != (when2)					\
224   || ! ((op1) == (op2)					\
225	 || (when1) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT			\
226	 || (when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS	\
227	 || (when1) == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS))
228
229  /* If we are going to reload an address, compute the reload type to
230     use.  */
231#define ADDR_TYPE(type)					\
232  ((type) == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS			\
233   ? RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS				\
234   : ((type) == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS		\
235      ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS			\
236      : (type)))
237
238#ifdef HAVE_SECONDARY_RELOADS
239static int push_secondary_reload (int, rtx, int, int, enum reg_class,
240				  enum machine_mode, enum reload_type,
241				  enum insn_code *);
242#endif
243static enum reg_class find_valid_class (enum machine_mode, int, unsigned int);
244static int reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (rtx, enum machine_mode, int);
245static void push_replacement (rtx *, int, enum machine_mode);
246static void dup_replacements (rtx *, rtx *);
247static void combine_reloads (void);
248static int find_reusable_reload (rtx *, rtx, enum reg_class,
249				 enum reload_type, int, int);
250static rtx find_dummy_reload (rtx, rtx, rtx *, rtx *, enum machine_mode,
251			      enum machine_mode, enum reg_class, int, int);
252static int hard_reg_set_here_p (unsigned int, unsigned int, rtx);
253static struct decomposition decompose (rtx);
254static int immune_p (rtx, rtx, struct decomposition);
255static int alternative_allows_memconst (const char *, int);
256static rtx find_reloads_toplev (rtx, int, enum reload_type, int, int, rtx,
257				int *);
258static rtx make_memloc (rtx, int);
259static int maybe_memory_address_p (enum machine_mode, rtx, rtx *);
260static int find_reloads_address (enum machine_mode, rtx *, rtx, rtx *,
261				 int, enum reload_type, int, rtx);
262static rtx subst_reg_equivs (rtx, rtx);
263static rtx subst_indexed_address (rtx);
264static void update_auto_inc_notes (rtx, int, int);
265static int find_reloads_address_1 (enum machine_mode, rtx, int, rtx *,
266				   int, enum reload_type,int, rtx);
267static void find_reloads_address_part (rtx, rtx *, enum reg_class,
268				       enum machine_mode, int,
269				       enum reload_type, int);
270static rtx find_reloads_subreg_address (rtx, int, int, enum reload_type,
271					int, rtx);
272static void copy_replacements_1 (rtx *, rtx *, int);
273static int find_inc_amount (rtx, rtx);
274
275#ifdef HAVE_SECONDARY_RELOADS
276
277/* Determine if any secondary reloads are needed for loading (if IN_P is
278   nonzero) or storing (if IN_P is zero) X to or from a reload register of
279   register class RELOAD_CLASS in mode RELOAD_MODE.  If secondary reloads
280   are needed, push them.
281
282   Return the reload number of the secondary reload we made, or -1 if
283   we didn't need one.  *PICODE is set to the insn_code to use if we do
284   need a secondary reload.  */
285
286static int
287push_secondary_reload (int in_p, rtx x, int opnum, int optional,
288		       enum reg_class reload_class,
289		       enum machine_mode reload_mode, enum reload_type type,
290		       enum insn_code *picode)
291{
292  enum reg_class class = NO_REGS;
293  enum machine_mode mode = reload_mode;
294  enum insn_code icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
295  enum reg_class t_class = NO_REGS;
296  enum machine_mode t_mode = VOIDmode;
297  enum insn_code t_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
298  enum reload_type secondary_type;
299  int s_reload, t_reload = -1;
300
301  if (type == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
302      || type == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
303      || type == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
304      || type == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
305    secondary_type = type;
306  else
307    secondary_type = in_p ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS : RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS;
308
309  *picode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
310
311  /* If X is a paradoxical SUBREG, use the inner value to determine both the
312     mode and object being reloaded.  */
313  if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
314      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
315	  > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))
316    {
317      x = SUBREG_REG (x);
318      reload_mode = GET_MODE (x);
319    }
320
321  /* If X is a pseudo-register that has an equivalent MEM (actually, if it
322     is still a pseudo-register by now, it *must* have an equivalent MEM
323     but we don't want to assume that), use that equivalent when seeing if
324     a secondary reload is needed since whether or not a reload is needed
325     might be sensitive to the form of the MEM.  */
326
327  if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
328      && reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (x)] != 0)
329    x = reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (x)];
330
331#ifdef SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
332  if (in_p)
333    class = SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (reload_class, reload_mode, x);
334#endif
335
336#ifdef SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
337  if (! in_p)
338    class = SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (reload_class, reload_mode, x);
339#endif
340
341  /* If we don't need any secondary registers, done.  */
342  if (class == NO_REGS)
343    return -1;
344
345  /* Get a possible insn to use.  If the predicate doesn't accept X, don't
346     use the insn.  */
347
348  icode = (in_p ? reload_in_optab[(int) reload_mode]
349	   : reload_out_optab[(int) reload_mode]);
350
351  if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
352      && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[in_p].predicate
353      && (! (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[in_p].predicate) (x, reload_mode)))
354    icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
355
356  /* If we will be using an insn, see if it can directly handle the reload
357     register we will be using.  If it can, the secondary reload is for a
358     scratch register.  If it can't, we will use the secondary reload for
359     an intermediate register and require a tertiary reload for the scratch
360     register.  */
361
362  if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
363    {
364      /* If IN_P is nonzero, the reload register will be the output in
365	 operand 0.  If IN_P is zero, the reload register will be the input
366	 in operand 1.  Outputs should have an initial "=", which we must
367	 skip.  */
368
369      enum reg_class insn_class;
370
371      if (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[!in_p].constraint[0] == 0)
372	insn_class = ALL_REGS;
373      else
374	{
375	  const char *insn_constraint
376	    = &insn_data[(int) icode].operand[!in_p].constraint[in_p];
377	  char insn_letter = *insn_constraint;
378	  insn_class
379	    = (insn_letter == 'r' ? GENERAL_REGS
380	       : REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT ((unsigned char) insn_letter,
381					    insn_constraint));
382
383          if (insn_class == NO_REGS)
384	    abort ();
385	  if (in_p
386	      && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[!in_p].constraint[0] != '=')
387	    abort ();
388	}
389
390      /* The scratch register's constraint must start with "=&".  */
391      if (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].constraint[0] != '='
392	  || insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].constraint[1] != '&')
393	abort ();
394
395      if (reg_class_subset_p (reload_class, insn_class))
396	mode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].mode;
397      else
398	{
399	  const char *t_constraint
400	    = &insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].constraint[2];
401	  char t_letter = *t_constraint;
402	  class = insn_class;
403	  t_mode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].mode;
404	  t_class = (t_letter == 'r' ? GENERAL_REGS
405		     : REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT ((unsigned char) t_letter,
406						  t_constraint));
407	  t_icode = icode;
408	  icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
409	}
410    }
411
412  /* This case isn't valid, so fail.  Reload is allowed to use the same
413     register for RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS and RELOAD_FOR_INPUT reloads, but
414     in the case of a secondary register, we actually need two different
415     registers for correct code.  We fail here to prevent the possibility of
416     silently generating incorrect code later.
417
418     The convention is that secondary input reloads are valid only if the
419     secondary_class is different from class.  If you have such a case, you
420     can not use secondary reloads, you must work around the problem some
421     other way.
422
423     Allow this when a reload_in/out pattern is being used.  I.e. assume
424     that the generated code handles this case.  */
425
426  if (in_p && class == reload_class && icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
427      && t_icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
428    abort ();
429
430  /* If we need a tertiary reload, see if we have one we can reuse or else
431     make a new one.  */
432
433  if (t_class != NO_REGS)
434    {
435      for (t_reload = 0; t_reload < n_reloads; t_reload++)
436	if (rld[t_reload].secondary_p
437	    && (reg_class_subset_p (t_class, rld[t_reload].class)
438		|| reg_class_subset_p (rld[t_reload].class, t_class))
439	    && ((in_p && rld[t_reload].inmode == t_mode)
440		|| (! in_p && rld[t_reload].outmode == t_mode))
441	    && ((in_p && (rld[t_reload].secondary_in_icode
442			  == CODE_FOR_nothing))
443		|| (! in_p &&(rld[t_reload].secondary_out_icode
444			      == CODE_FOR_nothing)))
445	    && (reg_class_size[(int) t_class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
446	    && MERGABLE_RELOADS (secondary_type,
447				 rld[t_reload].when_needed,
448				 opnum, rld[t_reload].opnum))
449	  {
450	    if (in_p)
451	      rld[t_reload].inmode = t_mode;
452	    if (! in_p)
453	      rld[t_reload].outmode = t_mode;
454
455	    if (reg_class_subset_p (t_class, rld[t_reload].class))
456	      rld[t_reload].class = t_class;
457
458	    rld[t_reload].opnum = MIN (rld[t_reload].opnum, opnum);
459	    rld[t_reload].optional &= optional;
460	    rld[t_reload].secondary_p = 1;
461	    if (MERGE_TO_OTHER (secondary_type, rld[t_reload].when_needed,
462				opnum, rld[t_reload].opnum))
463	      rld[t_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
464	  }
465
466      if (t_reload == n_reloads)
467	{
468	  /* We need to make a new tertiary reload for this register class.  */
469	  rld[t_reload].in = rld[t_reload].out = 0;
470	  rld[t_reload].class = t_class;
471	  rld[t_reload].inmode = in_p ? t_mode : VOIDmode;
472	  rld[t_reload].outmode = ! in_p ? t_mode : VOIDmode;
473	  rld[t_reload].reg_rtx = 0;
474	  rld[t_reload].optional = optional;
475	  rld[t_reload].inc = 0;
476	  /* Maybe we could combine these, but it seems too tricky.  */
477	  rld[t_reload].nocombine = 1;
478	  rld[t_reload].in_reg = 0;
479	  rld[t_reload].out_reg = 0;
480	  rld[t_reload].opnum = opnum;
481	  rld[t_reload].when_needed = secondary_type;
482	  rld[t_reload].secondary_in_reload = -1;
483	  rld[t_reload].secondary_out_reload = -1;
484	  rld[t_reload].secondary_in_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
485	  rld[t_reload].secondary_out_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
486	  rld[t_reload].secondary_p = 1;
487
488	  n_reloads++;
489	}
490    }
491
492  /* See if we can reuse an existing secondary reload.  */
493  for (s_reload = 0; s_reload < n_reloads; s_reload++)
494    if (rld[s_reload].secondary_p
495	&& (reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[s_reload].class)
496	    || reg_class_subset_p (rld[s_reload].class, class))
497	&& ((in_p && rld[s_reload].inmode == mode)
498	    || (! in_p && rld[s_reload].outmode == mode))
499	&& ((in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_in_reload == t_reload)
500	    || (! in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_out_reload == t_reload))
501	&& ((in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_in_icode == t_icode)
502	    || (! in_p && rld[s_reload].secondary_out_icode == t_icode))
503	&& (reg_class_size[(int) class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
504	&& MERGABLE_RELOADS (secondary_type, rld[s_reload].when_needed,
505			     opnum, rld[s_reload].opnum))
506      {
507	if (in_p)
508	  rld[s_reload].inmode = mode;
509	if (! in_p)
510	  rld[s_reload].outmode = mode;
511
512	if (reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[s_reload].class))
513	  rld[s_reload].class = class;
514
515	rld[s_reload].opnum = MIN (rld[s_reload].opnum, opnum);
516	rld[s_reload].optional &= optional;
517	rld[s_reload].secondary_p = 1;
518	if (MERGE_TO_OTHER (secondary_type, rld[s_reload].when_needed,
519			    opnum, rld[s_reload].opnum))
520	  rld[s_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
521      }
522
523  if (s_reload == n_reloads)
524    {
525#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
526      /* If we need a memory location to copy between the two reload regs,
527	 set it up now.  Note that we do the input case before making
528	 the reload and the output case after.  This is due to the
529	 way reloads are output.  */
530
531      if (in_p && icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
532	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (class, reload_class, mode))
533	{
534	  get_secondary_mem (x, reload_mode, opnum, type);
535
536	  /* We may have just added new reloads.  Make sure we add
537	     the new reload at the end.  */
538	  s_reload = n_reloads;
539	}
540#endif
541
542      /* We need to make a new secondary reload for this register class.  */
543      rld[s_reload].in = rld[s_reload].out = 0;
544      rld[s_reload].class = class;
545
546      rld[s_reload].inmode = in_p ? mode : VOIDmode;
547      rld[s_reload].outmode = ! in_p ? mode : VOIDmode;
548      rld[s_reload].reg_rtx = 0;
549      rld[s_reload].optional = optional;
550      rld[s_reload].inc = 0;
551      /* Maybe we could combine these, but it seems too tricky.  */
552      rld[s_reload].nocombine = 1;
553      rld[s_reload].in_reg = 0;
554      rld[s_reload].out_reg = 0;
555      rld[s_reload].opnum = opnum;
556      rld[s_reload].when_needed = secondary_type;
557      rld[s_reload].secondary_in_reload = in_p ? t_reload : -1;
558      rld[s_reload].secondary_out_reload = ! in_p ? t_reload : -1;
559      rld[s_reload].secondary_in_icode = in_p ? t_icode : CODE_FOR_nothing;
560      rld[s_reload].secondary_out_icode
561	= ! in_p ? t_icode : CODE_FOR_nothing;
562      rld[s_reload].secondary_p = 1;
563
564      n_reloads++;
565
566#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
567      if (! in_p && icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
568	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (reload_class, class, mode))
569	get_secondary_mem (x, mode, opnum, type);
570#endif
571    }
572
573  *picode = icode;
574  return s_reload;
575}
576#endif /* HAVE_SECONDARY_RELOADS */
577
578#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
579
580/* Return a memory location that will be used to copy X in mode MODE.
581   If we haven't already made a location for this mode in this insn,
582   call find_reloads_address on the location being returned.  */
583
584rtx
585get_secondary_mem (rtx x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, enum machine_mode mode,
586		   int opnum, enum reload_type type)
587{
588  rtx loc;
589  int mem_valid;
590
591  /* By default, if MODE is narrower than a word, widen it to a word.
592     This is required because most machines that require these memory
593     locations do not support short load and stores from all registers
594     (e.g., FP registers).  */
595
596#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
597  mode = SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (mode);
598#else
599  if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < BITS_PER_WORD && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode))
600    mode = mode_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_CLASS (mode), 0);
601#endif
602
603  /* If we already have made a MEM for this operand in MODE, return it.  */
604  if (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) mode][opnum] != 0)
605    return secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) mode][opnum];
606
607  /* If this is the first time we've tried to get a MEM for this mode,
608     allocate a new one.  `something_changed' in reload will get set
609     by noticing that the frame size has changed.  */
610
611  if (secondary_memlocs[(int) mode] == 0)
612    {
613#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
614      secondary_memlocs[(int) mode] = SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (mode);
615#else
616      secondary_memlocs[(int) mode]
617	= assign_stack_local (mode, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), 0);
618#endif
619    }
620
621  /* Get a version of the address doing any eliminations needed.  If that
622     didn't give us a new MEM, make a new one if it isn't valid.  */
623
624  loc = eliminate_regs (secondary_memlocs[(int) mode], VOIDmode, NULL_RTX);
625  mem_valid = strict_memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (loc, 0));
626
627  if (! mem_valid && loc == secondary_memlocs[(int) mode])
628    loc = copy_rtx (loc);
629
630  /* The only time the call below will do anything is if the stack
631     offset is too large.  In that case IND_LEVELS doesn't matter, so we
632     can just pass a zero.  Adjust the type to be the address of the
633     corresponding object.  If the address was valid, save the eliminated
634     address.  If it wasn't valid, we need to make a reload each time, so
635     don't save it.  */
636
637  if (! mem_valid)
638    {
639      type =  (type == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
640	       : type == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
641	       : RELOAD_OTHER);
642
643      find_reloads_address (mode, &loc, XEXP (loc, 0), &XEXP (loc, 0),
644			    opnum, type, 0, 0);
645    }
646
647  secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) mode][opnum] = loc;
648  if (secondary_memlocs_elim_used <= (int)mode)
649    secondary_memlocs_elim_used = (int)mode + 1;
650  return loc;
651}
652
653/* Clear any secondary memory locations we've made.  */
654
655void
656clear_secondary_mem (void)
657{
658  memset (secondary_memlocs, 0, sizeof secondary_memlocs);
659}
660#endif /* SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED */
661
662/* Find the largest class for which every register number plus N is valid in
663   M1 (if in range) and is cheap to move into REGNO.
664   Abort if no such class exists.  */
665
666static enum reg_class
667find_valid_class (enum machine_mode m1 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int n,
668		  unsigned int dest_regno ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
669{
670  int best_cost = -1;
671  int class;
672  int regno;
673  enum reg_class best_class = NO_REGS;
674  enum reg_class dest_class ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED = REGNO_REG_CLASS (dest_regno);
675  unsigned int best_size = 0;
676  int cost;
677
678  for (class = 1; class < N_REG_CLASSES; class++)
679    {
680      int bad = 0;
681      for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && ! bad; regno++)
682	if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[class], regno)
683	    && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[class], regno + n)
684	    && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno + n, m1))
685	  bad = 1;
686
687      if (bad)
688	continue;
689      cost = REGISTER_MOVE_COST (m1, class, dest_class);
690
691      if ((reg_class_size[class] > best_size
692	   && (best_cost < 0 || best_cost >= cost))
693	  || best_cost > cost)
694	{
695	  best_class = class;
696	  best_size = reg_class_size[class];
697	  best_cost = REGISTER_MOVE_COST (m1, class, dest_class);
698	}
699    }
700
701  if (best_size == 0)
702    abort ();
703
704  return best_class;
705}
706
707/* Return the number of a previously made reload that can be combined with
708   a new one, or n_reloads if none of the existing reloads can be used.
709   OUT, CLASS, TYPE and OPNUM are the same arguments as passed to
710   push_reload, they determine the kind of the new reload that we try to
711   combine.  P_IN points to the corresponding value of IN, which can be
712   modified by this function.
713   DONT_SHARE is nonzero if we can't share any input-only reload for IN.  */
714
715static int
716find_reusable_reload (rtx *p_in, rtx out, enum reg_class class,
717		      enum reload_type type, int opnum, int dont_share)
718{
719  rtx in = *p_in;
720  int i;
721  /* We can't merge two reloads if the output of either one is
722     earlyclobbered.  */
723
724  if (earlyclobber_operand_p (out))
725    return n_reloads;
726
727  /* We can use an existing reload if the class is right
728     and at least one of IN and OUT is a match
729     and the other is at worst neutral.
730     (A zero compared against anything is neutral.)
731
732     If SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES, don't use existing reloads unless they are
733     for the same thing since that can cause us to need more reload registers
734     than we otherwise would.  */
735
736  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
737    if ((reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[i].class)
738	 || reg_class_subset_p (rld[i].class, class))
739	/* If the existing reload has a register, it must fit our class.  */
740	&& (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
741	    || TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
742				  true_regnum (rld[i].reg_rtx)))
743	&& ((in != 0 && MATCHES (rld[i].in, in) && ! dont_share
744	     && (out == 0 || rld[i].out == 0 || MATCHES (rld[i].out, out)))
745	    || (out != 0 && MATCHES (rld[i].out, out)
746		&& (in == 0 || rld[i].in == 0 || MATCHES (rld[i].in, in))))
747	&& (rld[i].out == 0 || ! earlyclobber_operand_p (rld[i].out))
748	&& (reg_class_size[(int) class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
749	&& MERGABLE_RELOADS (type, rld[i].when_needed, opnum, rld[i].opnum))
750      return i;
751
752  /* Reloading a plain reg for input can match a reload to postincrement
753     that reg, since the postincrement's value is the right value.
754     Likewise, it can match a preincrement reload, since we regard
755     the preincrementation as happening before any ref in this insn
756     to that register.  */
757  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
758    if ((reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[i].class)
759	 || reg_class_subset_p (rld[i].class, class))
760	/* If the existing reload has a register, it must fit our
761	   class.  */
762	&& (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
763	    || TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
764				  true_regnum (rld[i].reg_rtx)))
765	&& out == 0 && rld[i].out == 0 && rld[i].in != 0
766	&& ((GET_CODE (in) == REG
767	     && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (rld[i].in)) == 'a'
768	     && MATCHES (XEXP (rld[i].in, 0), in))
769	    || (GET_CODE (rld[i].in) == REG
770		&& GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (in)) == 'a'
771		&& MATCHES (XEXP (in, 0), rld[i].in)))
772	&& (rld[i].out == 0 || ! earlyclobber_operand_p (rld[i].out))
773	&& (reg_class_size[(int) class] == 1 || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
774	&& MERGABLE_RELOADS (type, rld[i].when_needed,
775			     opnum, rld[i].opnum))
776      {
777	/* Make sure reload_in ultimately has the increment,
778	   not the plain register.  */
779	if (GET_CODE (in) == REG)
780	  *p_in = rld[i].in;
781	return i;
782      }
783  return n_reloads;
784}
785
786/* Return nonzero if X is a SUBREG which will require reloading of its
787   SUBREG_REG expression.  */
788
789static int
790reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, int output)
791{
792  rtx inner;
793
794  /* Only SUBREGs are problematical.  */
795  if (GET_CODE (x) != SUBREG)
796    return 0;
797
798  inner = SUBREG_REG (x);
799
800  /* If INNER is a constant or PLUS, then INNER must be reloaded.  */
801  if (CONSTANT_P (inner) || GET_CODE (inner) == PLUS)
802    return 1;
803
804  /* If INNER is not a hard register, then INNER will not need to
805     be reloaded.  */
806  if (GET_CODE (inner) != REG
807      || REGNO (inner) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
808    return 0;
809
810  /* If INNER is not ok for MODE, then INNER will need reloading.  */
811  if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (subreg_regno (x), mode))
812    return 1;
813
814  /* If the outer part is a word or smaller, INNER larger than a
815     word and the number of regs for INNER is not the same as the
816     number of words in INNER, then INNER will need reloading.  */
817  return (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
818	  && output
819	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) > UNITS_PER_WORD
820	  && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
821	      != (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (inner), GET_MODE (inner))));
822}
823
824/* Return nonzero if IN can be reloaded into REGNO with mode MODE without
825   requiring an extra reload register.  The caller has already found that
826   IN contains some reference to REGNO, so check that we can produce the
827   new value in a single step.  E.g. if we have
828   (set (reg r13) (plus (reg r13) (const int 1))), and there is an
829   instruction that adds one to a register, this should succeed.
830   However, if we have something like
831   (set (reg r13) (plus (reg r13) (const int 999))), and the constant 999
832   needs to be loaded into a register first, we need a separate reload
833   register.
834   Such PLUS reloads are generated by find_reload_address_part.
835   The out-of-range PLUS expressions are usually introduced in the instruction
836   patterns by register elimination and substituting pseudos without a home
837   by their function-invariant equivalences.  */
838static int
839can_reload_into (rtx in, int regno, enum machine_mode mode)
840{
841  rtx dst, test_insn;
842  int r = 0;
843  struct recog_data save_recog_data;
844
845  /* For matching constraints, we often get notional input reloads where
846     we want to use the original register as the reload register.  I.e.
847     technically this is a non-optional input-output reload, but IN is
848     already a valid register, and has been chosen as the reload register.
849     Speed this up, since it trivially works.  */
850  if (GET_CODE (in) == REG)
851    return 1;
852
853  /* To test MEMs properly, we'd have to take into account all the reloads
854     that are already scheduled, which can become quite complicated.
855     And since we've already handled address reloads for this MEM, it
856     should always succeed anyway.  */
857  if (GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
858    return 1;
859
860  /* If we can make a simple SET insn that does the job, everything should
861     be fine.  */
862  dst =  gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
863  test_insn = make_insn_raw (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dst, in));
864  save_recog_data = recog_data;
865  if (recog_memoized (test_insn) >= 0)
866    {
867      extract_insn (test_insn);
868      r = constrain_operands (1);
869    }
870  recog_data = save_recog_data;
871  return r;
872}
873
874/* Record one reload that needs to be performed.
875   IN is an rtx saying where the data are to be found before this instruction.
876   OUT says where they must be stored after the instruction.
877   (IN is zero for data not read, and OUT is zero for data not written.)
878   INLOC and OUTLOC point to the places in the instructions where
879   IN and OUT were found.
880   If IN and OUT are both nonzero, it means the same register must be used
881   to reload both IN and OUT.
882
883   CLASS is a register class required for the reloaded data.
884   INMODE is the machine mode that the instruction requires
885   for the reg that replaces IN and OUTMODE is likewise for OUT.
886
887   If IN is zero, then OUT's location and mode should be passed as
888   INLOC and INMODE.
889
890   STRICT_LOW is the 1 if there is a containing STRICT_LOW_PART rtx.
891
892   OPTIONAL nonzero means this reload does not need to be performed:
893   it can be discarded if that is more convenient.
894
895   OPNUM and TYPE say what the purpose of this reload is.
896
897   The return value is the reload-number for this reload.
898
899   If both IN and OUT are nonzero, in some rare cases we might
900   want to make two separate reloads.  (Actually we never do this now.)
901   Therefore, the reload-number for OUT is stored in
902   output_reloadnum when we return; the return value applies to IN.
903   Usually (presently always), when IN and OUT are nonzero,
904   the two reload-numbers are equal, but the caller should be careful to
905   distinguish them.  */
906
907int
908push_reload (rtx in, rtx out, rtx *inloc, rtx *outloc,
909	     enum reg_class class, enum machine_mode inmode,
910	     enum machine_mode outmode, int strict_low, int optional,
911	     int opnum, enum reload_type type)
912{
913  int i;
914  int dont_share = 0;
915  int dont_remove_subreg = 0;
916  rtx *in_subreg_loc = 0, *out_subreg_loc = 0;
917  int secondary_in_reload = -1, secondary_out_reload = -1;
918  enum insn_code secondary_in_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
919  enum insn_code secondary_out_icode = CODE_FOR_nothing;
920
921  /* INMODE and/or OUTMODE could be VOIDmode if no mode
922     has been specified for the operand.  In that case,
923     use the operand's mode as the mode to reload.  */
924  if (inmode == VOIDmode && in != 0)
925    inmode = GET_MODE (in);
926  if (outmode == VOIDmode && out != 0)
927    outmode = GET_MODE (out);
928
929  /* If IN is a pseudo register everywhere-equivalent to a constant, and
930     it is not in a hard register, reload straight from the constant,
931     since we want to get rid of such pseudo registers.
932     Often this is done earlier, but not always in find_reloads_address.  */
933  if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == REG)
934    {
935      int regno = REGNO (in);
936
937      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
938	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
939	in = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
940    }
941
942  /* Likewise for OUT.  Of course, OUT will never be equivalent to
943     an actual constant, but it might be equivalent to a memory location
944     (in the case of a parameter).  */
945  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == REG)
946    {
947      int regno = REGNO (out);
948
949      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
950	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
951	out = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
952    }
953
954  /* If we have a read-write operand with an address side-effect,
955     change either IN or OUT so the side-effect happens only once.  */
956  if (in != 0 && out != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == MEM && rtx_equal_p (in, out))
957    switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (in, 0)))
958      {
959      case POST_INC: case POST_DEC:   case POST_MODIFY:
960	in = replace_equiv_address_nv (in, XEXP (XEXP (in, 0), 0));
961	break;
962
963      case PRE_INC: case PRE_DEC: case PRE_MODIFY:
964	out = replace_equiv_address_nv (out, XEXP (XEXP (out, 0), 0));
965	break;
966
967      default:
968	break;
969      }
970
971  /* If we are reloading a (SUBREG constant ...), really reload just the
972     inside expression in its own mode.  Similarly for (SUBREG (PLUS ...)).
973     If we have (SUBREG:M1 (MEM:M2 ...) ...) (or an inner REG that is still
974     a pseudo and hence will become a MEM) with M1 wider than M2 and the
975     register is a pseudo, also reload the inside expression.
976     For machines that extend byte loads, do this for any SUBREG of a pseudo
977     where both M1 and M2 are a word or smaller, M1 is wider than M2, and
978     M2 is an integral mode that gets extended when loaded.
979     Similar issue for (SUBREG:M1 (REG:M2 ...) ...) for a hard register R where
980     either M1 is not valid for R or M2 is wider than a word but we only
981     need one word to store an M2-sized quantity in R.
982     (However, if OUT is nonzero, we need to reload the reg *and*
983     the subreg, so do nothing here, and let following statement handle it.)
984
985     Note that the case of (SUBREG (CONST_INT...)...) is handled elsewhere;
986     we can't handle it here because CONST_INT does not indicate a mode.
987
988     Similarly, we must reload the inside expression if we have a
989     STRICT_LOW_PART (presumably, in == out in the cas).
990
991     Also reload the inner expression if it does not require a secondary
992     reload but the SUBREG does.
993
994     Finally, reload the inner expression if it is a register that is in
995     the class whose registers cannot be referenced in a different size
996     and M1 is not the same size as M2.  If subreg_lowpart_p is false, we
997     cannot reload just the inside since we might end up with the wrong
998     register class.  But if it is inside a STRICT_LOW_PART, we have
999     no choice, so we hope we do get the right register class there.  */
1000
1001  if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG
1002      && (subreg_lowpart_p (in) || strict_low)
1003#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1004      && !CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)), inmode, class)
1005#endif
1006      && (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (in))
1007	  || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == PLUS
1008	  || strict_low
1009	  || (((GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1010		&& REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1011	       || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == MEM)
1012	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1013		   > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))))
1014#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
1015		  || (GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
1016		      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1017			  <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
1018		      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1019			  > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))))
1020		      && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1021		      && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))) != NIL)
1022#endif
1023#ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
1024		  || ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1025		       < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))))
1026		      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD ==
1027			  ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in))) - 1)
1028			   / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
1029#endif
1030		  ))
1031	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1032	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1033	      /* The case where out is nonzero
1034		 is handled differently in the following statement.  */
1035	      && (out == 0 || subreg_lowpart_p (in))
1036	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
1037		   && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1038		       > UNITS_PER_WORD)
1039		   && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1040			/ UNITS_PER_WORD)
1041		       != (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1042						  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))))
1043		  || ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (subreg_regno (in), inmode)))
1044#ifdef SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1045	  || (SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class, inmode, in) != NO_REGS
1046	      && (SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class,
1047						GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1048						SUBREG_REG (in))
1049		  == NO_REGS))
1050#endif
1051#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1052	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1053	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1054	      && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P
1055	      (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)), inmode))
1056#endif
1057	  ))
1058    {
1059      in_subreg_loc = inloc;
1060      inloc = &SUBREG_REG (in);
1061      in = *inloc;
1062#if ! defined (LOAD_EXTEND_OP) && ! defined (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS)
1063      if (GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
1064	/* This is supposed to happen only for paradoxical subregs made by
1065	   combine.c.  (SUBREG (MEM)) isn't supposed to occur other ways.  */
1066	if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (in)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode))
1067	  abort ();
1068#endif
1069      inmode = GET_MODE (in);
1070    }
1071
1072  /* Similar issue for (SUBREG:M1 (REG:M2 ...) ...) for a hard register R where
1073     either M1 is not valid for R or M2 is wider than a word but we only
1074     need one word to store an M2-sized quantity in R.
1075
1076     However, we must reload the inner reg *as well as* the subreg in
1077     that case.  */
1078
1079  /* Similar issue for (SUBREG constant ...) if it was not handled by the
1080     code above.  This can happen if SUBREG_BYTE != 0.  */
1081
1082  if (in != 0 && reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (in, inmode, 0))
1083    {
1084      enum reg_class in_class = class;
1085
1086      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG)
1087	in_class
1088	  = find_valid_class (inmode,
1089			      subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1090						   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1091						   SUBREG_BYTE (in),
1092						   GET_MODE (in)),
1093			      REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)));
1094
1095      /* This relies on the fact that emit_reload_insns outputs the
1096	 instructions for input reloads of type RELOAD_OTHER in the same
1097	 order as the reloads.  Thus if the outer reload is also of type
1098	 RELOAD_OTHER, we are guaranteed that this inner reload will be
1099	 output before the outer reload.  */
1100      push_reload (SUBREG_REG (in), NULL_RTX, &SUBREG_REG (in), (rtx *) 0,
1101		   in_class, VOIDmode, VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
1102      dont_remove_subreg = 1;
1103    }
1104
1105  /* Similarly for paradoxical and problematical SUBREGs on the output.
1106     Note that there is no reason we need worry about the previous value
1107     of SUBREG_REG (out); even if wider than out,
1108     storing in a subreg is entitled to clobber it all
1109     (except in the case of STRICT_LOW_PART,
1110     and in that case the constraint should label it input-output.)  */
1111  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG
1112      && (subreg_lowpart_p (out) || strict_low)
1113#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1114      && !CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)), outmode, class)
1115#endif
1116      && (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (out))
1117	  || strict_low
1118	  || (((GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1119		&& REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1120	       || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == MEM)
1121	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode)
1122		   > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out))))
1123#ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
1124		  || ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode)
1125		       < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out))))
1126		      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD ==
1127			  ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out))) - 1)
1128			   / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
1129#endif
1130		  ))
1131	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1132	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1133	      && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
1134		   && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)))
1135		       > UNITS_PER_WORD)
1136		   && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)))
1137			/ UNITS_PER_WORD)
1138		       != (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1139						  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)))))
1140		  || ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (subreg_regno (out), outmode)))
1141#ifdef SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1142	  || (SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class, outmode, out) != NO_REGS
1143	      && (SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (class,
1144						 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1145						 SUBREG_REG (out))
1146		  == NO_REGS))
1147#endif
1148#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
1149	  || (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1150	      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1151	      && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1152					   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1153					   outmode))
1154#endif
1155	  ))
1156    {
1157      out_subreg_loc = outloc;
1158      outloc = &SUBREG_REG (out);
1159      out = *outloc;
1160#if ! defined (LOAD_EXTEND_OP) && ! defined (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS)
1161      if (GET_CODE (out) == MEM
1162	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (out)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode))
1163	abort ();
1164#endif
1165      outmode = GET_MODE (out);
1166    }
1167
1168  /* Similar issue for (SUBREG:M1 (REG:M2 ...) ...) for a hard register R where
1169     either M1 is not valid for R or M2 is wider than a word but we only
1170     need one word to store an M2-sized quantity in R.
1171
1172     However, we must reload the inner reg *as well as* the subreg in
1173     that case.  In this case, the inner reg is an in-out reload.  */
1174
1175  if (out != 0 && reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (out, outmode, 1))
1176    {
1177      /* This relies on the fact that emit_reload_insns outputs the
1178	 instructions for output reloads of type RELOAD_OTHER in reverse
1179	 order of the reloads.  Thus if the outer reload is also of type
1180	 RELOAD_OTHER, we are guaranteed that this inner reload will be
1181	 output after the outer reload.  */
1182      dont_remove_subreg = 1;
1183      push_reload (SUBREG_REG (out), SUBREG_REG (out), &SUBREG_REG (out),
1184		   &SUBREG_REG (out),
1185		   find_valid_class (outmode,
1186				     subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1187							  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1188							  SUBREG_BYTE (out),
1189							  GET_MODE (out)),
1190				     REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out))),
1191		   VOIDmode, VOIDmode, 0, 0,
1192		   opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
1193    }
1194
1195  /* If IN appears in OUT, we can't share any input-only reload for IN.  */
1196  if (in != 0 && out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == MEM
1197      && (GET_CODE (in) == REG || GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
1198      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (in, XEXP (out, 0)))
1199    dont_share = 1;
1200
1201  /* If IN is a SUBREG of a hard register, make a new REG.  This
1202     simplifies some of the cases below.  */
1203
1204  if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1205      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1206      && ! dont_remove_subreg)
1207    in = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (in), subreg_regno (in));
1208
1209  /* Similarly for OUT.  */
1210  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG
1211      && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1212      && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1213      && ! dont_remove_subreg)
1214    out = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (out), subreg_regno (out));
1215
1216  /* Narrow down the class of register wanted if that is
1217     desirable on this machine for efficiency.  */
1218  if (in != 0)
1219    class = PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (in, class);
1220
1221  /* Output reloads may need analogous treatment, different in detail.  */
1222#ifdef PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1223  if (out != 0)
1224    class = PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (out, class);
1225#endif
1226
1227  /* Make sure we use a class that can handle the actual pseudo
1228     inside any subreg.  For example, on the 386, QImode regs
1229     can appear within SImode subregs.  Although GENERAL_REGS
1230     can handle SImode, QImode needs a smaller class.  */
1231#ifdef LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1232  if (in_subreg_loc)
1233    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (inmode, class);
1234  else if (in != 0 && GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG)
1235    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)), class);
1236
1237  if (out_subreg_loc)
1238    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (outmode, class);
1239  if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG)
1240    class = LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)), class);
1241#endif
1242
1243  /* Verify that this class is at least possible for the mode that
1244     is specified.  */
1245  if (this_insn_is_asm)
1246    {
1247      enum machine_mode mode;
1248      if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode))
1249	mode = inmode;
1250      else
1251	mode = outmode;
1252      if (mode == VOIDmode)
1253	{
1254	  error_for_asm (this_insn, "cannot reload integer constant operand in `asm'");
1255	  mode = word_mode;
1256	  if (in != 0)
1257	    inmode = word_mode;
1258	  if (out != 0)
1259	    outmode = word_mode;
1260	}
1261      for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
1262	if (HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (i, mode)
1263	    && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class], i))
1264	  {
1265	    int nregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (i, mode);
1266
1267	    int j;
1268	    for (j = 1; j < nregs; j++)
1269	      if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class], i + j))
1270		break;
1271	    if (j == nregs)
1272	      break;
1273	  }
1274      if (i == FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1275	{
1276	  error_for_asm (this_insn, "impossible register constraint in `asm'");
1277	  class = ALL_REGS;
1278	}
1279    }
1280
1281  /* Optional output reloads are always OK even if we have no register class,
1282     since the function of these reloads is only to have spill_reg_store etc.
1283     set, so that the storing insn can be deleted later.  */
1284  if (class == NO_REGS
1285      && (optional == 0 || type != RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT))
1286    abort ();
1287
1288  i = find_reusable_reload (&in, out, class, type, opnum, dont_share);
1289
1290  if (i == n_reloads)
1291    {
1292      /* See if we need a secondary reload register to move between CLASS
1293	 and IN or CLASS and OUT.  Get the icode and push any required reloads
1294	 needed for each of them if so.  */
1295
1296#ifdef SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1297      if (in != 0)
1298	secondary_in_reload
1299	  = push_secondary_reload (1, in, opnum, optional, class, inmode, type,
1300				   &secondary_in_icode);
1301#endif
1302
1303#ifdef SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1304      if (out != 0 && GET_CODE (out) != SCRATCH)
1305	secondary_out_reload
1306	  = push_secondary_reload (0, out, opnum, optional, class, outmode,
1307				   type, &secondary_out_icode);
1308#endif
1309
1310      /* We found no existing reload suitable for re-use.
1311	 So add an additional reload.  */
1312
1313#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1314      /* If a memory location is needed for the copy, make one.  */
1315      if (in != 0 && (GET_CODE (in) == REG || GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG)
1316	  && reg_or_subregno (in) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1317	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (REGNO_REG_CLASS (reg_or_subregno (in)),
1318				      class, inmode))
1319	get_secondary_mem (in, inmode, opnum, type);
1320#endif
1321
1322      i = n_reloads;
1323      rld[i].in = in;
1324      rld[i].out = out;
1325      rld[i].class = class;
1326      rld[i].inmode = inmode;
1327      rld[i].outmode = outmode;
1328      rld[i].reg_rtx = 0;
1329      rld[i].optional = optional;
1330      rld[i].inc = 0;
1331      rld[i].nocombine = 0;
1332      rld[i].in_reg = inloc ? *inloc : 0;
1333      rld[i].out_reg = outloc ? *outloc : 0;
1334      rld[i].opnum = opnum;
1335      rld[i].when_needed = type;
1336      rld[i].secondary_in_reload = secondary_in_reload;
1337      rld[i].secondary_out_reload = secondary_out_reload;
1338      rld[i].secondary_in_icode = secondary_in_icode;
1339      rld[i].secondary_out_icode = secondary_out_icode;
1340      rld[i].secondary_p = 0;
1341
1342      n_reloads++;
1343
1344#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1345      if (out != 0 && (GET_CODE (out) == REG || GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG)
1346	  && reg_or_subregno (out) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1347	  && SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (class,
1348				      REGNO_REG_CLASS (reg_or_subregno (out)),
1349				      outmode))
1350	get_secondary_mem (out, outmode, opnum, type);
1351#endif
1352    }
1353  else
1354    {
1355      /* We are reusing an existing reload,
1356	 but we may have additional information for it.
1357	 For example, we may now have both IN and OUT
1358	 while the old one may have just one of them.  */
1359
1360      /* The modes can be different.  If they are, we want to reload in
1361	 the larger mode, so that the value is valid for both modes.  */
1362      if (inmode != VOIDmode
1363	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].inmode))
1364	rld[i].inmode = inmode;
1365      if (outmode != VOIDmode
1366	  && GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].outmode))
1367	rld[i].outmode = outmode;
1368      if (in != 0)
1369	{
1370	  rtx in_reg = inloc ? *inloc : 0;
1371	  /* If we merge reloads for two distinct rtl expressions that
1372	     are identical in content, there might be duplicate address
1373	     reloads.  Remove the extra set now, so that if we later find
1374	     that we can inherit this reload, we can get rid of the
1375	     address reloads altogether.
1376
1377	     Do not do this if both reloads are optional since the result
1378	     would be an optional reload which could potentially leave
1379	     unresolved address replacements.
1380
1381	     It is not sufficient to call transfer_replacements since
1382	     choose_reload_regs will remove the replacements for address
1383	     reloads of inherited reloads which results in the same
1384	     problem.  */
1385	  if (rld[i].in != in && rtx_equal_p (in, rld[i].in)
1386	      && ! (rld[i].optional && optional))
1387	    {
1388	      /* We must keep the address reload with the lower operand
1389		 number alive.  */
1390	      if (opnum > rld[i].opnum)
1391		{
1392		  remove_address_replacements (in);
1393		  in = rld[i].in;
1394		  in_reg = rld[i].in_reg;
1395		}
1396	      else
1397		remove_address_replacements (rld[i].in);
1398	    }
1399	  rld[i].in = in;
1400	  rld[i].in_reg = in_reg;
1401	}
1402      if (out != 0)
1403	{
1404	  rld[i].out = out;
1405	  rld[i].out_reg = outloc ? *outloc : 0;
1406	}
1407      if (reg_class_subset_p (class, rld[i].class))
1408	rld[i].class = class;
1409      rld[i].optional &= optional;
1410      if (MERGE_TO_OTHER (type, rld[i].when_needed,
1411			  opnum, rld[i].opnum))
1412	rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
1413      rld[i].opnum = MIN (rld[i].opnum, opnum);
1414    }
1415
1416  /* If the ostensible rtx being reloaded differs from the rtx found
1417     in the location to substitute, this reload is not safe to combine
1418     because we cannot reliably tell whether it appears in the insn.  */
1419
1420  if (in != 0 && in != *inloc)
1421    rld[i].nocombine = 1;
1422
1423#if 0
1424  /* This was replaced by changes in find_reloads_address_1 and the new
1425     function inc_for_reload, which go with a new meaning of reload_inc.  */
1426
1427  /* If this is an IN/OUT reload in an insn that sets the CC,
1428     it must be for an autoincrement.  It doesn't work to store
1429     the incremented value after the insn because that would clobber the CC.
1430     So we must do the increment of the value reloaded from,
1431     increment it, store it back, then decrement again.  */
1432  if (out != 0 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (this_insn)))
1433    {
1434      out = 0;
1435      rld[i].out = 0;
1436      rld[i].inc = find_inc_amount (PATTERN (this_insn), in);
1437      /* If we did not find a nonzero amount-to-increment-by,
1438	 that contradicts the belief that IN is being incremented
1439	 in an address in this insn.  */
1440      if (rld[i].inc == 0)
1441	abort ();
1442    }
1443#endif
1444
1445  /* If we will replace IN and OUT with the reload-reg,
1446     record where they are located so that substitution need
1447     not do a tree walk.  */
1448
1449  if (replace_reloads)
1450    {
1451      if (inloc != 0)
1452	{
1453	  struct replacement *r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
1454	  r->what = i;
1455	  r->subreg_loc = in_subreg_loc;
1456	  r->where = inloc;
1457	  r->mode = inmode;
1458	}
1459      if (outloc != 0 && outloc != inloc)
1460	{
1461	  struct replacement *r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
1462	  r->what = i;
1463	  r->where = outloc;
1464	  r->subreg_loc = out_subreg_loc;
1465	  r->mode = outmode;
1466	}
1467    }
1468
1469  /* If this reload is just being introduced and it has both
1470     an incoming quantity and an outgoing quantity that are
1471     supposed to be made to match, see if either one of the two
1472     can serve as the place to reload into.
1473
1474     If one of them is acceptable, set rld[i].reg_rtx
1475     to that one.  */
1476
1477  if (in != 0 && out != 0 && in != out && rld[i].reg_rtx == 0)
1478    {
1479      rld[i].reg_rtx = find_dummy_reload (in, out, inloc, outloc,
1480					  inmode, outmode,
1481					  rld[i].class, i,
1482					  earlyclobber_operand_p (out));
1483
1484      /* If the outgoing register already contains the same value
1485	 as the incoming one, we can dispense with loading it.
1486	 The easiest way to tell the caller that is to give a phony
1487	 value for the incoming operand (same as outgoing one).  */
1488      if (rld[i].reg_rtx == out
1489	  && (GET_CODE (in) == REG || CONSTANT_P (in))
1490	  && 0 != find_equiv_reg (in, this_insn, 0, REGNO (out),
1491				  static_reload_reg_p, i, inmode))
1492	rld[i].in = out;
1493    }
1494
1495  /* If this is an input reload and the operand contains a register that
1496     dies in this insn and is used nowhere else, see if it is the right class
1497     to be used for this reload.  Use it if so.  (This occurs most commonly
1498     in the case of paradoxical SUBREGs and in-out reloads).  We cannot do
1499     this if it is also an output reload that mentions the register unless
1500     the output is a SUBREG that clobbers an entire register.
1501
1502     Note that the operand might be one of the spill regs, if it is a
1503     pseudo reg and we are in a block where spilling has not taken place.
1504     But if there is no spilling in this block, that is OK.
1505     An explicitly used hard reg cannot be a spill reg.  */
1506
1507  if (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0 && in != 0)
1508    {
1509      rtx note;
1510      int regno;
1511      enum machine_mode rel_mode = inmode;
1512
1513      if (out && GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode))
1514	rel_mode = outmode;
1515
1516      for (note = REG_NOTES (this_insn); note; note = XEXP (note, 1))
1517	if (REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD
1518	    && GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG
1519	    && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1520	    && reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), in)
1521	    && ! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno,
1522					       (regno
1523						+ HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno,
1524								    rel_mode)),
1525					       PATTERN (this_insn), inloc)
1526	    /* If this is also an output reload, IN cannot be used as
1527	       the reload register if it is set in this insn unless IN
1528	       is also OUT.  */
1529	    && (out == 0 || in == out
1530		|| ! hard_reg_set_here_p (regno,
1531					  (regno
1532					   + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno,
1533							       rel_mode)),
1534					  PATTERN (this_insn)))
1535	    /* ??? Why is this code so different from the previous?
1536	       Is there any simple coherent way to describe the two together?
1537	       What's going on here.  */
1538	    && (in != out
1539		|| (GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG
1540		    && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (in)) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1))
1541			 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1542			== ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)))
1543			     + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
1544	    /* Make sure the operand fits in the reg that dies.  */
1545	    && (GET_MODE_SIZE (rel_mode)
1546		<= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))))
1547	    && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, inmode)
1548	    && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, outmode))
1549	  {
1550	    unsigned int offs;
1551	    unsigned int nregs = MAX (HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, inmode),
1552				      HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, outmode));
1553
1554	    for (offs = 0; offs < nregs; offs++)
1555	      if (fixed_regs[regno + offs]
1556		  || ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
1557					  regno + offs))
1558		break;
1559
1560	    if (offs == nregs
1561		&& (! (refers_to_regno_for_reload_p
1562		       (regno, (regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, inmode)),
1563				in, (rtx *)0))
1564		    || can_reload_into (in, regno, inmode)))
1565	      {
1566		rld[i].reg_rtx = gen_rtx_REG (rel_mode, regno);
1567		break;
1568	      }
1569	  }
1570    }
1571
1572  if (out)
1573    output_reloadnum = i;
1574
1575  return i;
1576}
1577
1578/* Record an additional place we must replace a value
1579   for which we have already recorded a reload.
1580   RELOADNUM is the value returned by push_reload
1581   when the reload was recorded.
1582   This is used in insn patterns that use match_dup.  */
1583
1584static void
1585push_replacement (rtx *loc, int reloadnum, enum machine_mode mode)
1586{
1587  if (replace_reloads)
1588    {
1589      struct replacement *r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
1590      r->what = reloadnum;
1591      r->where = loc;
1592      r->subreg_loc = 0;
1593      r->mode = mode;
1594    }
1595}
1596
1597/* Duplicate any replacement we have recorded to apply at
1598   location ORIG_LOC to also be performed at DUP_LOC.
1599   This is used in insn patterns that use match_dup.  */
1600
1601static void
1602dup_replacements (rtx *dup_loc, rtx *orig_loc)
1603{
1604  int i, n = n_replacements;
1605
1606  for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
1607    {
1608      struct replacement *r = &replacements[i];
1609      if (r->where == orig_loc)
1610	push_replacement (dup_loc, r->what, r->mode);
1611    }
1612}
1613
1614/* Transfer all replacements that used to be in reload FROM to be in
1615   reload TO.  */
1616
1617void
1618transfer_replacements (int to, int from)
1619{
1620  int i;
1621
1622  for (i = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
1623    if (replacements[i].what == from)
1624      replacements[i].what = to;
1625}
1626
1627/* IN_RTX is the value loaded by a reload that we now decided to inherit,
1628   or a subpart of it.  If we have any replacements registered for IN_RTX,
1629   cancel the reloads that were supposed to load them.
1630   Return nonzero if we canceled any reloads.  */
1631int
1632remove_address_replacements (rtx in_rtx)
1633{
1634  int i, j;
1635  char reload_flags[MAX_RELOADS];
1636  int something_changed = 0;
1637
1638  memset (reload_flags, 0, sizeof reload_flags);
1639  for (i = 0, j = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
1640    {
1641      if (loc_mentioned_in_p (replacements[i].where, in_rtx))
1642	reload_flags[replacements[i].what] |= 1;
1643      else
1644	{
1645	  replacements[j++] = replacements[i];
1646	  reload_flags[replacements[i].what] |= 2;
1647	}
1648    }
1649  /* Note that the following store must be done before the recursive calls.  */
1650  n_replacements = j;
1651
1652  for (i = n_reloads - 1; i >= 0; i--)
1653    {
1654      if (reload_flags[i] == 1)
1655	{
1656	  deallocate_reload_reg (i);
1657	  remove_address_replacements (rld[i].in);
1658	  rld[i].in = 0;
1659	  something_changed = 1;
1660	}
1661    }
1662  return something_changed;
1663}
1664
1665/* If there is only one output reload, and it is not for an earlyclobber
1666   operand, try to combine it with a (logically unrelated) input reload
1667   to reduce the number of reload registers needed.
1668
1669   This is safe if the input reload does not appear in
1670   the value being output-reloaded, because this implies
1671   it is not needed any more once the original insn completes.
1672
1673   If that doesn't work, see we can use any of the registers that
1674   die in this insn as a reload register.  We can if it is of the right
1675   class and does not appear in the value being output-reloaded.  */
1676
1677static void
1678combine_reloads (void)
1679{
1680  int i;
1681  int output_reload = -1;
1682  int secondary_out = -1;
1683  rtx note;
1684
1685  /* Find the output reload; return unless there is exactly one
1686     and that one is mandatory.  */
1687
1688  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
1689    if (rld[i].out != 0)
1690      {
1691	if (output_reload >= 0)
1692	  return;
1693	output_reload = i;
1694      }
1695
1696  if (output_reload < 0 || rld[output_reload].optional)
1697    return;
1698
1699  /* An input-output reload isn't combinable.  */
1700
1701  if (rld[output_reload].in != 0)
1702    return;
1703
1704  /* If this reload is for an earlyclobber operand, we can't do anything.  */
1705  if (earlyclobber_operand_p (rld[output_reload].out))
1706    return;
1707
1708  /* If there is a reload for part of the address of this operand, we would
1709     need to chnage it to RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS.  But that would extend
1710     its life to the point where doing this combine would not lower the
1711     number of spill registers needed.  */
1712  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
1713    if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
1714	 || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
1715	&& rld[i].opnum == rld[output_reload].opnum)
1716      return;
1717
1718  /* Check each input reload; can we combine it?  */
1719
1720  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
1721    if (rld[i].in && ! rld[i].optional && ! rld[i].nocombine
1722	/* Life span of this reload must not extend past main insn.  */
1723	&& rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
1724	&& rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS
1725	&& rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_OTHER
1726	&& (CLASS_MAX_NREGS (rld[i].class, rld[i].inmode)
1727	    == CLASS_MAX_NREGS (rld[output_reload].class,
1728				rld[output_reload].outmode))
1729	&& rld[i].inc == 0
1730	&& rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
1731#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1732	/* Don't combine two reloads with different secondary
1733	   memory locations.  */
1734	&& (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[i].opnum] == 0
1735	    || secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum] == 0
1736	    || rtx_equal_p (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[i].opnum],
1737			    secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum]))
1738#endif
1739	&& (SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1740	    ? (rld[i].class == rld[output_reload].class)
1741	    : (reg_class_subset_p (rld[i].class,
1742				   rld[output_reload].class)
1743	       || reg_class_subset_p (rld[output_reload].class,
1744				      rld[i].class)))
1745	&& (MATCHES (rld[i].in, rld[output_reload].out)
1746	    /* Args reversed because the first arg seems to be
1747	       the one that we imagine being modified
1748	       while the second is the one that might be affected.  */
1749	    || (! reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (rld[output_reload].out,
1750						      rld[i].in)
1751		/* However, if the input is a register that appears inside
1752		   the output, then we also can't share.
1753		   Imagine (set (mem (reg 69)) (plus (reg 69) ...)).
1754		   If the same reload reg is used for both reg 69 and the
1755		   result to be stored in memory, then that result
1756		   will clobber the address of the memory ref.  */
1757		&& ! (GET_CODE (rld[i].in) == REG
1758		      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (rld[i].in,
1759							     rld[output_reload].out))))
1760	&& ! reload_inner_reg_of_subreg (rld[i].in, rld[i].inmode,
1761					 rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_INPUT)
1762	&& (reg_class_size[(int) rld[i].class]
1763	    || SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
1764	/* We will allow making things slightly worse by combining an
1765	   input and an output, but no worse than that.  */
1766	&& (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
1767	    || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT))
1768      {
1769	int j;
1770
1771	/* We have found a reload to combine with!  */
1772	rld[i].out = rld[output_reload].out;
1773	rld[i].out_reg = rld[output_reload].out_reg;
1774	rld[i].outmode = rld[output_reload].outmode;
1775	/* Mark the old output reload as inoperative.  */
1776	rld[output_reload].out = 0;
1777	/* The combined reload is needed for the entire insn.  */
1778	rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_OTHER;
1779	/* If the output reload had a secondary reload, copy it.  */
1780	if (rld[output_reload].secondary_out_reload != -1)
1781	  {
1782	    rld[i].secondary_out_reload
1783	      = rld[output_reload].secondary_out_reload;
1784	    rld[i].secondary_out_icode
1785	      = rld[output_reload].secondary_out_icode;
1786	  }
1787
1788#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1789	/* Copy any secondary MEM.  */
1790	if (secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum] != 0)
1791	  secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[i].opnum]
1792	    = secondary_memlocs_elim[(int) rld[output_reload].outmode][rld[output_reload].opnum];
1793#endif
1794	/* If required, minimize the register class.  */
1795	if (reg_class_subset_p (rld[output_reload].class,
1796				rld[i].class))
1797	  rld[i].class = rld[output_reload].class;
1798
1799	/* Transfer all replacements from the old reload to the combined.  */
1800	for (j = 0; j < n_replacements; j++)
1801	  if (replacements[j].what == output_reload)
1802	    replacements[j].what = i;
1803
1804	return;
1805      }
1806
1807  /* If this insn has only one operand that is modified or written (assumed
1808     to be the first),  it must be the one corresponding to this reload.  It
1809     is safe to use anything that dies in this insn for that output provided
1810     that it does not occur in the output (we already know it isn't an
1811     earlyclobber.  If this is an asm insn, give up.  */
1812
1813  if (INSN_CODE (this_insn) == -1)
1814    return;
1815
1816  for (i = 1; i < insn_data[INSN_CODE (this_insn)].n_operands; i++)
1817    if (insn_data[INSN_CODE (this_insn)].operand[i].constraint[0] == '='
1818	|| insn_data[INSN_CODE (this_insn)].operand[i].constraint[0] == '+')
1819      return;
1820
1821  /* See if some hard register that dies in this insn and is not used in
1822     the output is the right class.  Only works if the register we pick
1823     up can fully hold our output reload.  */
1824  for (note = REG_NOTES (this_insn); note; note = XEXP (note, 1))
1825    if (REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD
1826	&& GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == REG
1827	&& ! reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (note, 0),
1828						 rld[output_reload].out)
1829	&& REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1830	&& HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)), rld[output_reload].outmode)
1831	&& TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) rld[output_reload].class],
1832			      REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
1833	&& (HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)), rld[output_reload].outmode)
1834	    <= HARD_REGNO_NREGS (REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)), GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))))
1835	/* Ensure that a secondary or tertiary reload for this output
1836	   won't want this register.  */
1837	&& ((secondary_out = rld[output_reload].secondary_out_reload) == -1
1838	    || (! (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT
1839		   (reg_class_contents[(int) rld[secondary_out].class],
1840		    REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))))
1841		&& ((secondary_out = rld[secondary_out].secondary_out_reload) == -1
1842		    ||  ! (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT
1843			   (reg_class_contents[(int) rld[secondary_out].class],
1844			    REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))))))
1845	&& ! fixed_regs[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))])
1846      {
1847	rld[output_reload].reg_rtx
1848	  = gen_rtx_REG (rld[output_reload].outmode,
1849			 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)));
1850	return;
1851      }
1852}
1853
1854/* Try to find a reload register for an in-out reload (expressions IN and OUT).
1855   See if one of IN and OUT is a register that may be used;
1856   this is desirable since a spill-register won't be needed.
1857   If so, return the register rtx that proves acceptable.
1858
1859   INLOC and OUTLOC are locations where IN and OUT appear in the insn.
1860   CLASS is the register class required for the reload.
1861
1862   If FOR_REAL is >= 0, it is the number of the reload,
1863   and in some cases when it can be discovered that OUT doesn't need
1864   to be computed, clear out rld[FOR_REAL].out.
1865
1866   If FOR_REAL is -1, this should not be done, because this call
1867   is just to see if a register can be found, not to find and install it.
1868
1869   EARLYCLOBBER is nonzero if OUT is an earlyclobber operand.  This
1870   puts an additional constraint on being able to use IN for OUT since
1871   IN must not appear elsewhere in the insn (it is assumed that IN itself
1872   is safe from the earlyclobber).  */
1873
1874static rtx
1875find_dummy_reload (rtx real_in, rtx real_out, rtx *inloc, rtx *outloc,
1876		   enum machine_mode inmode, enum machine_mode outmode,
1877		   enum reg_class class, int for_real, int earlyclobber)
1878{
1879  rtx in = real_in;
1880  rtx out = real_out;
1881  int in_offset = 0;
1882  int out_offset = 0;
1883  rtx value = 0;
1884
1885  /* If operands exceed a word, we can't use either of them
1886     unless they have the same size.  */
1887  if (GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) != GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode)
1888      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (outmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
1889	  || GET_MODE_SIZE (inmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD))
1890    return 0;
1891
1892  /* Note that {in,out}_offset are needed only when 'in' or 'out'
1893     respectively refers to a hard register.  */
1894
1895  /* Find the inside of any subregs.  */
1896  while (GET_CODE (out) == SUBREG)
1897    {
1898      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (out)) == REG
1899	  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1900	out_offset += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1901					   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (out)),
1902					   SUBREG_BYTE (out),
1903					   GET_MODE (out));
1904      out = SUBREG_REG (out);
1905    }
1906  while (GET_CODE (in) == SUBREG)
1907    {
1908      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (in)) == REG
1909	  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1910	in_offset += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1911					  GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (in)),
1912					  SUBREG_BYTE (in),
1913					  GET_MODE (in));
1914      in = SUBREG_REG (in);
1915    }
1916
1917  /* Narrow down the reg class, the same way push_reload will;
1918     otherwise we might find a dummy now, but push_reload won't.  */
1919  class = PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (in, class);
1920
1921  /* See if OUT will do.  */
1922  if (GET_CODE (out) == REG
1923      && REGNO (out) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1924    {
1925      unsigned int regno = REGNO (out) + out_offset;
1926      unsigned int nwords = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, outmode);
1927      rtx saved_rtx;
1928
1929      /* When we consider whether the insn uses OUT,
1930	 ignore references within IN.  They don't prevent us
1931	 from copying IN into OUT, because those refs would
1932	 move into the insn that reloads IN.
1933
1934	 However, we only ignore IN in its role as this reload.
1935	 If the insn uses IN elsewhere and it contains OUT,
1936	 that counts.  We can't be sure it's the "same" operand
1937	 so it might not go through this reload.  */
1938      saved_rtx = *inloc;
1939      *inloc = const0_rtx;
1940
1941      if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1942	  && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, outmode)
1943	  && ! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, regno + nwords,
1944					     PATTERN (this_insn), outloc))
1945	{
1946	  unsigned int i;
1947
1948	  for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
1949	    if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
1950				     regno + i))
1951	      break;
1952
1953	  if (i == nwords)
1954	    {
1955	      if (GET_CODE (real_out) == REG)
1956		value = real_out;
1957	      else
1958		value = gen_rtx_REG (outmode, regno);
1959	    }
1960	}
1961
1962      *inloc = saved_rtx;
1963    }
1964
1965  /* Consider using IN if OUT was not acceptable
1966     or if OUT dies in this insn (like the quotient in a divmod insn).
1967     We can't use IN unless it is dies in this insn,
1968     which means we must know accurately which hard regs are live.
1969     Also, the result can't go in IN if IN is used within OUT,
1970     or if OUT is an earlyclobber and IN appears elsewhere in the insn.  */
1971  if (hard_regs_live_known
1972      && GET_CODE (in) == REG
1973      && REGNO (in) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1974      && (value == 0
1975	  || find_reg_note (this_insn, REG_UNUSED, real_out))
1976      && find_reg_note (this_insn, REG_DEAD, real_in)
1977      && !fixed_regs[REGNO (in)]
1978      && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (in),
1979			     /* The only case where out and real_out might
1980				have different modes is where real_out
1981				is a subreg, and in that case, out
1982				has a real mode.  */
1983			     (GET_MODE (out) != VOIDmode
1984			      ? GET_MODE (out) : outmode)))
1985    {
1986      unsigned int regno = REGNO (in) + in_offset;
1987      unsigned int nwords = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, inmode);
1988
1989      if (! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, regno + nwords, out, (rtx*) 0)
1990	  && ! hard_reg_set_here_p (regno, regno + nwords,
1991				    PATTERN (this_insn))
1992	  && (! earlyclobber
1993	      || ! refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, regno + nwords,
1994						 PATTERN (this_insn), inloc)))
1995	{
1996	  unsigned int i;
1997
1998	  for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
1999	    if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
2000				     regno + i))
2001	      break;
2002
2003	  if (i == nwords)
2004	    {
2005	      /* If we were going to use OUT as the reload reg
2006		 and changed our mind, it means OUT is a dummy that
2007		 dies here.  So don't bother copying value to it.  */
2008	      if (for_real >= 0 && value == real_out)
2009		rld[for_real].out = 0;
2010	      if (GET_CODE (real_in) == REG)
2011		value = real_in;
2012	      else
2013		value = gen_rtx_REG (inmode, regno);
2014	    }
2015	}
2016    }
2017
2018  return value;
2019}
2020
2021/* This page contains subroutines used mainly for determining
2022   whether the IN or an OUT of a reload can serve as the
2023   reload register.  */
2024
2025/* Return 1 if X is an operand of an insn that is being earlyclobbered.  */
2026
2027int
2028earlyclobber_operand_p (rtx x)
2029{
2030  int i;
2031
2032  for (i = 0; i < n_earlyclobbers; i++)
2033    if (reload_earlyclobbers[i] == x)
2034      return 1;
2035
2036  return 0;
2037}
2038
2039/* Return 1 if expression X alters a hard reg in the range
2040   from BEG_REGNO (inclusive) to END_REGNO (exclusive),
2041   either explicitly or in the guise of a pseudo-reg allocated to REGNO.
2042   X should be the body of an instruction.  */
2043
2044static int
2045hard_reg_set_here_p (unsigned int beg_regno, unsigned int end_regno, rtx x)
2046{
2047  if (GET_CODE (x) == SET || GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
2048    {
2049      rtx op0 = SET_DEST (x);
2050
2051      while (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
2052	op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
2053      if (GET_CODE (op0) == REG)
2054	{
2055	  unsigned int r = REGNO (op0);
2056
2057	  /* See if this reg overlaps range under consideration.  */
2058	  if (r < end_regno
2059	      && r + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (r, GET_MODE (op0)) > beg_regno)
2060	    return 1;
2061	}
2062    }
2063  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
2064    {
2065      int i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1;
2066
2067      for (; i >= 0; i--)
2068	if (hard_reg_set_here_p (beg_regno, end_regno, XVECEXP (x, 0, i)))
2069	  return 1;
2070    }
2071
2072  return 0;
2073}
2074
2075/* Return 1 if ADDR is a valid memory address for mode MODE,
2076   and check that each pseudo reg has the proper kind of
2077   hard reg.  */
2078
2079int
2080strict_memory_address_p (enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx addr)
2081{
2082  GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (mode, addr, win);
2083  return 0;
2084
2085 win:
2086  return 1;
2087}
2088
2089/* Like rtx_equal_p except that it allows a REG and a SUBREG to match
2090   if they are the same hard reg, and has special hacks for
2091   autoincrement and autodecrement.
2092   This is specifically intended for find_reloads to use
2093   in determining whether two operands match.
2094   X is the operand whose number is the lower of the two.
2095
2096   The value is 2 if Y contains a pre-increment that matches
2097   a non-incrementing address in X.  */
2098
2099/* ??? To be completely correct, we should arrange to pass
2100   for X the output operand and for Y the input operand.
2101   For now, we assume that the output operand has the lower number
2102   because that is natural in (SET output (... input ...)).  */
2103
2104int
2105operands_match_p (rtx x, rtx y)
2106{
2107  int i;
2108  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
2109  const char *fmt;
2110  int success_2;
2111
2112  if (x == y)
2113    return 1;
2114  if ((code == REG || (code == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG))
2115      && (GET_CODE (y) == REG || (GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG
2116				  && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (y)) == REG)))
2117    {
2118      int j;
2119
2120      if (code == SUBREG)
2121	{
2122	  i = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
2123	  if (i >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2124	    goto slow;
2125	  i += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)),
2126				    GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
2127				    SUBREG_BYTE (x),
2128				    GET_MODE (x));
2129	}
2130      else
2131	i = REGNO (x);
2132
2133      if (GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG)
2134	{
2135	  j = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (y));
2136	  if (j >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2137	    goto slow;
2138	  j += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (y)),
2139				    GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (y)),
2140				    SUBREG_BYTE (y),
2141				    GET_MODE (y));
2142	}
2143      else
2144	j = REGNO (y);
2145
2146      /* On a WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN machine, point to the last register of a
2147	 multiple hard register group of scalar integer registers, so that
2148	 for example (reg:DI 0) and (reg:SI 1) will be considered the same
2149	 register.  */
2150      if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) > UNITS_PER_WORD
2151	  && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
2152	  && i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2153	i += HARD_REGNO_NREGS (i, GET_MODE (x)) - 1;
2154      if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (y)) > UNITS_PER_WORD
2155	  && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (y))
2156	  && j < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2157	j += HARD_REGNO_NREGS (j, GET_MODE (y)) - 1;
2158
2159      return i == j;
2160    }
2161  /* If two operands must match, because they are really a single
2162     operand of an assembler insn, then two postincrements are invalid
2163     because the assembler insn would increment only once.
2164     On the other hand, a postincrement matches ordinary indexing
2165     if the postincrement is the output operand.  */
2166  if (code == POST_DEC || code == POST_INC || code == POST_MODIFY)
2167    return operands_match_p (XEXP (x, 0), y);
2168  /* Two preincrements are invalid
2169     because the assembler insn would increment only once.
2170     On the other hand, a preincrement matches ordinary indexing
2171     if the preincrement is the input operand.
2172     In this case, return 2, since some callers need to do special
2173     things when this happens.  */
2174  if (GET_CODE (y) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (y) == PRE_INC
2175      || GET_CODE (y) == PRE_MODIFY)
2176    return operands_match_p (x, XEXP (y, 0)) ? 2 : 0;
2177
2178 slow:
2179
2180  /* Now we have disposed of all the cases
2181     in which different rtx codes can match.  */
2182  if (code != GET_CODE (y))
2183    return 0;
2184  if (code == LABEL_REF)
2185    return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2186  if (code == SYMBOL_REF)
2187    return XSTR (x, 0) == XSTR (y, 0);
2188
2189  /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent.  */
2190
2191  if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
2192    return 0;
2193
2194  /* Compare the elements.  If any pair of corresponding elements
2195     fail to match, return 0 for the whole things.  */
2196
2197  success_2 = 0;
2198  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2199  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2200    {
2201      int val, j;
2202      switch (fmt[i])
2203	{
2204	case 'w':
2205	  if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2206	    return 0;
2207	  break;
2208
2209	case 'i':
2210	  if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2211	    return 0;
2212	  break;
2213
2214	case 'e':
2215	  val = operands_match_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i));
2216	  if (val == 0)
2217	    return 0;
2218	  /* If any subexpression returns 2,
2219	     we should return 2 if we are successful.  */
2220	  if (val == 2)
2221	    success_2 = 1;
2222	  break;
2223
2224	case '0':
2225	  break;
2226
2227	case 'E':
2228	  if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2229	    return 0;
2230	  for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; --j)
2231	    {
2232	      val = operands_match_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j));
2233	      if (val == 0)
2234		return 0;
2235	      if (val == 2)
2236		success_2 = 1;
2237	    }
2238	  break;
2239
2240	  /* It is believed that rtx's at this level will never
2241	     contain anything but integers and other rtx's,
2242	     except for within LABEL_REFs and SYMBOL_REFs.  */
2243	default:
2244	  abort ();
2245	}
2246    }
2247  return 1 + success_2;
2248}
2249
2250/* Describe the range of registers or memory referenced by X.
2251   If X is a register, set REG_FLAG and put the first register
2252   number into START and the last plus one into END.
2253   If X is a memory reference, put a base address into BASE
2254   and a range of integer offsets into START and END.
2255   If X is pushing on the stack, we can assume it causes no trouble,
2256   so we set the SAFE field.  */
2257
2258static struct decomposition
2259decompose (rtx x)
2260{
2261  struct decomposition val;
2262  int all_const = 0;
2263
2264  val.reg_flag = 0;
2265  val.safe = 0;
2266  val.base = 0;
2267  if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
2268    {
2269      rtx base = NULL_RTX, offset = 0;
2270      rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0);
2271
2272      if (GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
2273	  || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
2274	{
2275	  val.base = XEXP (addr, 0);
2276	  val.start = -GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2277	  val.end = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2278	  val.safe = REGNO (val.base) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM;
2279	  return val;
2280	}
2281
2282      if (GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_MODIFY || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_MODIFY)
2283	{
2284	  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == PLUS
2285	      && XEXP (addr, 0) == XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 0)
2286	      && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1)))
2287	    {
2288	      val.base  = XEXP (addr, 0);
2289	      val.start = -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1));
2290	      val.end   = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1));
2291	      val.safe  = REGNO (val.base) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM;
2292	      return val;
2293	    }
2294	}
2295
2296      if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
2297	{
2298	  addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
2299	  all_const = 1;
2300	}
2301      if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
2302	{
2303	  if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (addr, 0)))
2304	    {
2305	      base = XEXP (addr, 1);
2306	      offset = XEXP (addr, 0);
2307	    }
2308	  else if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (addr, 1)))
2309	    {
2310	      base = XEXP (addr, 0);
2311	      offset = XEXP (addr, 1);
2312	    }
2313	}
2314
2315      if (offset == 0)
2316	{
2317	  base = addr;
2318	  offset = const0_rtx;
2319	}
2320      if (GET_CODE (offset) == CONST)
2321	offset = XEXP (offset, 0);
2322      if (GET_CODE (offset) == PLUS)
2323	{
2324	  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (offset, 0)) == CONST_INT)
2325	    {
2326	      base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, XEXP (offset, 1));
2327	      offset = XEXP (offset, 0);
2328	    }
2329	  else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (offset, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2330	    {
2331	      base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, XEXP (offset, 0));
2332	      offset = XEXP (offset, 1);
2333	    }
2334	  else
2335	    {
2336	      base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, offset);
2337	      offset = const0_rtx;
2338	    }
2339	}
2340      else if (GET_CODE (offset) != CONST_INT)
2341	{
2342	  base = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (base), base, offset);
2343	  offset = const0_rtx;
2344	}
2345
2346      if (all_const && GET_CODE (base) == PLUS)
2347	base = gen_rtx_CONST (GET_MODE (base), base);
2348
2349      if (GET_CODE (offset) != CONST_INT)
2350	abort ();
2351
2352      val.start = INTVAL (offset);
2353      val.end = val.start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2354      val.base = base;
2355      return val;
2356    }
2357  else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
2358    {
2359      val.reg_flag = 1;
2360      val.start = true_regnum (x);
2361      if (val.start < 0)
2362	{
2363	  /* A pseudo with no hard reg.  */
2364	  val.start = REGNO (x);
2365	  val.end = val.start + 1;
2366	}
2367      else
2368	/* A hard reg.  */
2369	val.end = val.start + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (val.start, GET_MODE (x));
2370    }
2371  else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
2372    {
2373      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
2374	/* This could be more precise, but it's good enough.  */
2375	return decompose (SUBREG_REG (x));
2376      val.reg_flag = 1;
2377      val.start = true_regnum (x);
2378      if (val.start < 0)
2379	return decompose (SUBREG_REG (x));
2380      else
2381	/* A hard reg.  */
2382	val.end = val.start + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (val.start, GET_MODE (x));
2383    }
2384  else if (CONSTANT_P (x)
2385	   /* This hasn't been assigned yet, so it can't conflict yet.  */
2386	   || GET_CODE (x) == SCRATCH)
2387    val.safe = 1;
2388  else
2389    abort ();
2390  return val;
2391}
2392
2393/* Return 1 if altering Y will not modify the value of X.
2394   Y is also described by YDATA, which should be decompose (Y).  */
2395
2396static int
2397immune_p (rtx x, rtx y, struct decomposition ydata)
2398{
2399  struct decomposition xdata;
2400
2401  if (ydata.reg_flag)
2402    return !refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (ydata.start, ydata.end, x, (rtx*) 0);
2403  if (ydata.safe)
2404    return 1;
2405
2406  if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
2407    abort ();
2408  /* If Y is memory and X is not, Y can't affect X.  */
2409  if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
2410    return 1;
2411
2412  xdata = decompose (x);
2413
2414  if (! rtx_equal_p (xdata.base, ydata.base))
2415    {
2416      /* If bases are distinct symbolic constants, there is no overlap.  */
2417      if (CONSTANT_P (xdata.base) && CONSTANT_P (ydata.base))
2418	return 1;
2419      /* Constants and stack slots never overlap.  */
2420      if (CONSTANT_P (xdata.base)
2421	  && (ydata.base == frame_pointer_rtx
2422	      || ydata.base == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
2423	      || ydata.base == stack_pointer_rtx))
2424	return 1;
2425      if (CONSTANT_P (ydata.base)
2426	  && (xdata.base == frame_pointer_rtx
2427	      || xdata.base == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
2428	      || xdata.base == stack_pointer_rtx))
2429	return 1;
2430      /* If either base is variable, we don't know anything.  */
2431      return 0;
2432    }
2433
2434  return (xdata.start >= ydata.end || ydata.start >= xdata.end);
2435}
2436
2437/* Similar, but calls decompose.  */
2438
2439int
2440safe_from_earlyclobber (rtx op, rtx clobber)
2441{
2442  struct decomposition early_data;
2443
2444  early_data = decompose (clobber);
2445  return immune_p (op, clobber, early_data);
2446}
2447
2448/* Main entry point of this file: search the body of INSN
2449   for values that need reloading and record them with push_reload.
2450   REPLACE nonzero means record also where the values occur
2451   so that subst_reloads can be used.
2452
2453   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirection are supported by this
2454   machine; a value of zero means that a memory reference is not a valid
2455   memory address.
2456
2457   LIVE_KNOWN says we have valid information about which hard
2458   regs are live at each point in the program; this is true when
2459   we are called from global_alloc but false when stupid register
2460   allocation has been done.
2461
2462   RELOAD_REG_P if nonzero is a vector indexed by hard reg number
2463   which is nonnegative if the reg has been commandeered for reloading into.
2464   It is copied into STATIC_RELOAD_REG_P and referenced from there
2465   by various subroutines.
2466
2467   Return TRUE if some operands need to be changed, because of swapping
2468   commutative operands, reg_equiv_address substitution, or whatever.  */
2469
2470int
2471find_reloads (rtx insn, int replace, int ind_levels, int live_known,
2472	      short *reload_reg_p)
2473{
2474  int insn_code_number;
2475  int i, j;
2476  int noperands;
2477  /* These start out as the constraints for the insn
2478     and they are chewed up as we consider alternatives.  */
2479  char *constraints[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2480  /* These are the preferred classes for an operand, or NO_REGS if it isn't
2481     a register.  */
2482  enum reg_class preferred_class[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2483  char pref_or_nothing[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2484  /* Nonzero for a MEM operand whose entire address needs a reload.  */
2485  int address_reloaded[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2486  /* Nonzero for an address operand that needs to be completely reloaded.  */
2487  int address_operand_reloaded[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2488  /* Value of enum reload_type to use for operand.  */
2489  enum reload_type operand_type[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2490  /* Value of enum reload_type to use within address of operand.  */
2491  enum reload_type address_type[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2492  /* Save the usage of each operand.  */
2493  enum reload_usage { RELOAD_READ, RELOAD_READ_WRITE, RELOAD_WRITE } modified[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2494  int no_input_reloads = 0, no_output_reloads = 0;
2495  int n_alternatives;
2496  int this_alternative[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2497  char this_alternative_match_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2498  char this_alternative_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2499  char this_alternative_offmemok[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2500  char this_alternative_earlyclobber[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2501  int this_alternative_matches[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2502  int swapped;
2503  int goal_alternative[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2504  int this_alternative_number;
2505  int goal_alternative_number = 0;
2506  int operand_reloadnum[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2507  int goal_alternative_matches[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2508  int goal_alternative_matched[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2509  char goal_alternative_match_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2510  char goal_alternative_win[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2511  char goal_alternative_offmemok[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2512  char goal_alternative_earlyclobber[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2513  int goal_alternative_swapped;
2514  int best;
2515  int commutative;
2516  char operands_match[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS][MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2517  rtx substed_operand[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2518  rtx body = PATTERN (insn);
2519  rtx set = single_set (insn);
2520  int goal_earlyclobber = 0, this_earlyclobber;
2521  enum machine_mode operand_mode[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
2522  int retval = 0;
2523
2524  this_insn = insn;
2525  n_reloads = 0;
2526  n_replacements = 0;
2527  n_earlyclobbers = 0;
2528  replace_reloads = replace;
2529  hard_regs_live_known = live_known;
2530  static_reload_reg_p = reload_reg_p;
2531
2532  /* JUMP_INSNs and CALL_INSNs are not allowed to have any output reloads;
2533     neither are insns that SET cc0.  Insns that use CC0 are not allowed
2534     to have any input reloads.  */
2535  if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN || GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
2536    no_output_reloads = 1;
2537
2538#ifdef HAVE_cc0
2539  if (reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (insn)))
2540    no_input_reloads = 1;
2541  if (reg_set_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (insn)))
2542    no_output_reloads = 1;
2543#endif
2544
2545#ifdef SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2546  /* The eliminated forms of any secondary memory locations are per-insn, so
2547     clear them out here.  */
2548
2549  if (secondary_memlocs_elim_used)
2550    {
2551      memset (secondary_memlocs_elim, 0,
2552	      sizeof (secondary_memlocs_elim[0]) * secondary_memlocs_elim_used);
2553      secondary_memlocs_elim_used = 0;
2554    }
2555#endif
2556
2557  /* Dispose quickly of (set (reg..) (reg..)) if both have hard regs and it
2558     is cheap to move between them.  If it is not, there may not be an insn
2559     to do the copy, so we may need a reload.  */
2560  if (GET_CODE (body) == SET
2561      && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (body)) == REG
2562      && REGNO (SET_DEST (body)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2563      && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (body)) == REG
2564      && REGNO (SET_SRC (body)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2565      && REGISTER_MOVE_COST (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (body)),
2566			     REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (SET_SRC (body))),
2567			     REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (SET_DEST (body)))) == 2)
2568    return 0;
2569
2570  extract_insn (insn);
2571
2572  noperands = reload_n_operands = recog_data.n_operands;
2573  n_alternatives = recog_data.n_alternatives;
2574
2575  /* Just return "no reloads" if insn has no operands with constraints.  */
2576  if (noperands == 0 || n_alternatives == 0)
2577    return 0;
2578
2579  insn_code_number = INSN_CODE (insn);
2580  this_insn_is_asm = insn_code_number < 0;
2581
2582  memcpy (operand_mode, recog_data.operand_mode,
2583	  noperands * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
2584  memcpy (constraints, recog_data.constraints, noperands * sizeof (char *));
2585
2586  commutative = -1;
2587
2588  /* If we will need to know, later, whether some pair of operands
2589     are the same, we must compare them now and save the result.
2590     Reloading the base and index registers will clobber them
2591     and afterward they will fail to match.  */
2592
2593  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
2594    {
2595      char *p;
2596      int c;
2597
2598      substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i];
2599      p = constraints[i];
2600
2601      modified[i] = RELOAD_READ;
2602
2603      /* Scan this operand's constraint to see if it is an output operand,
2604	 an in-out operand, is commutative, or should match another.  */
2605
2606      while ((c = *p))
2607	{
2608	  p += CONSTRAINT_LEN (c, p);
2609	  if (c == '=')
2610	    modified[i] = RELOAD_WRITE;
2611	  else if (c == '+')
2612	    modified[i] = RELOAD_READ_WRITE;
2613	  else if (c == '%')
2614	    {
2615	      /* The last operand should not be marked commutative.  */
2616	      if (i == noperands - 1)
2617		abort ();
2618
2619	      /* We currently only support one commutative pair of
2620		 operands.  Some existing asm code currently uses more
2621		 than one pair.  Previously, that would usually work,
2622		 but sometimes it would crash the compiler.  We
2623		 continue supporting that case as well as we can by
2624		 silently ignoring all but the first pair.  In the
2625		 future we may handle it correctly.  */
2626	      if (commutative < 0)
2627		commutative = i;
2628	      else if (!this_insn_is_asm)
2629		abort ();
2630	    }
2631	  else if (ISDIGIT (c))
2632	    {
2633	      c = strtoul (p - 1, &p, 10);
2634
2635	      operands_match[c][i]
2636		= operands_match_p (recog_data.operand[c],
2637				    recog_data.operand[i]);
2638
2639	      /* An operand may not match itself.  */
2640	      if (c == i)
2641		abort ();
2642
2643	      /* If C can be commuted with C+1, and C might need to match I,
2644		 then C+1 might also need to match I.  */
2645	      if (commutative >= 0)
2646		{
2647		  if (c == commutative || c == commutative + 1)
2648		    {
2649		      int other = c + (c == commutative ? 1 : -1);
2650		      operands_match[other][i]
2651			= operands_match_p (recog_data.operand[other],
2652					    recog_data.operand[i]);
2653		    }
2654		  if (i == commutative || i == commutative + 1)
2655		    {
2656		      int other = i + (i == commutative ? 1 : -1);
2657		      operands_match[c][other]
2658			= operands_match_p (recog_data.operand[c],
2659					    recog_data.operand[other]);
2660		    }
2661		  /* Note that C is supposed to be less than I.
2662		     No need to consider altering both C and I because in
2663		     that case we would alter one into the other.  */
2664		}
2665	    }
2666	}
2667    }
2668
2669  /* Examine each operand that is a memory reference or memory address
2670     and reload parts of the addresses into index registers.
2671     Also here any references to pseudo regs that didn't get hard regs
2672     but are equivalent to constants get replaced in the insn itself
2673     with those constants.  Nobody will ever see them again.
2674
2675     Finally, set up the preferred classes of each operand.  */
2676
2677  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
2678    {
2679      RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2680
2681      address_reloaded[i] = 0;
2682      address_operand_reloaded[i] = 0;
2683      operand_type[i] = (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
2684			 : modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT
2685			 : RELOAD_OTHER);
2686      address_type[i]
2687	= (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ ? RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
2688	   : modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE ? RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
2689	   : RELOAD_OTHER);
2690
2691      if (*constraints[i] == 0)
2692	/* Ignore things like match_operator operands.  */
2693	;
2694      else if (constraints[i][0] == 'p'
2695	       || EXTRA_ADDRESS_CONSTRAINT (constraints[i][0], constraints[i]))
2696	{
2697	  address_operand_reloaded[i]
2698	    = find_reloads_address (recog_data.operand_mode[i], (rtx*) 0,
2699				    recog_data.operand[i],
2700				    recog_data.operand_loc[i],
2701				    i, operand_type[i], ind_levels, insn);
2702
2703	  /* If we now have a simple operand where we used to have a
2704	     PLUS or MULT, re-recognize and try again.  */
2705	  if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*recog_data.operand_loc[i])) == 'o'
2706	       || GET_CODE (*recog_data.operand_loc[i]) == SUBREG)
2707	      && (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == MULT
2708		  || GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == PLUS))
2709	    {
2710	      INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
2711	      retval = find_reloads (insn, replace, ind_levels, live_known,
2712				     reload_reg_p);
2713	      return retval;
2714	    }
2715
2716	  recog_data.operand[i] = *recog_data.operand_loc[i];
2717	  substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i];
2718
2719	  /* Address operands are reloaded in their existing mode,
2720	     no matter what is specified in the machine description.  */
2721	  operand_mode[i] = GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2722	}
2723      else if (code == MEM)
2724	{
2725	  address_reloaded[i]
2726	    = find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]),
2727				    recog_data.operand_loc[i],
2728				    XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0),
2729				    &XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0),
2730				    i, address_type[i], ind_levels, insn);
2731	  recog_data.operand[i] = *recog_data.operand_loc[i];
2732	  substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i];
2733	}
2734      else if (code == SUBREG)
2735	{
2736	  rtx reg = SUBREG_REG (recog_data.operand[i]);
2737	  rtx op
2738	    = find_reloads_toplev (recog_data.operand[i], i, address_type[i],
2739				   ind_levels,
2740				   set != 0
2741				   && &SET_DEST (set) == recog_data.operand_loc[i],
2742				   insn,
2743				   &address_reloaded[i]);
2744
2745	  /* If we made a MEM to load (a part of) the stackslot of a pseudo
2746	     that didn't get a hard register, emit a USE with a REG_EQUAL
2747	     note in front so that we might inherit a previous, possibly
2748	     wider reload.  */
2749
2750	  if (replace
2751	      && GET_CODE (op) == MEM
2752	      && GET_CODE (reg) == REG
2753	      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (reg))
2754		  >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op))))
2755	    set_unique_reg_note (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, reg),
2756						   insn),
2757				 REG_EQUAL, reg_equiv_memory_loc[REGNO (reg)]);
2758
2759	  substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i] = op;
2760	}
2761      else if (code == PLUS || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '1')
2762	/* We can get a PLUS as an "operand" as a result of register
2763	   elimination.  See eliminate_regs and gen_reload.  We handle
2764	   a unary operator by reloading the operand.  */
2765	substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
2766	  = find_reloads_toplev (recog_data.operand[i], i, address_type[i],
2767				 ind_levels, 0, insn,
2768				 &address_reloaded[i]);
2769      else if (code == REG)
2770	{
2771	  /* This is equivalent to calling find_reloads_toplev.
2772	     The code is duplicated for speed.
2773	     When we find a pseudo always equivalent to a constant,
2774	     we replace it by the constant.  We must be sure, however,
2775	     that we don't try to replace it in the insn in which it
2776	     is being set.  */
2777	  int regno = REGNO (recog_data.operand[i]);
2778	  if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0
2779	      && (set == 0 || &SET_DEST (set) != recog_data.operand_loc[i]))
2780	    {
2781	      /* Record the existing mode so that the check if constants are
2782		 allowed will work when operand_mode isn't specified.  */
2783
2784	      if (operand_mode[i] == VOIDmode)
2785		operand_mode[i] = GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2786
2787	      substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
2788		= reg_equiv_constant[regno];
2789	    }
2790	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0
2791	      && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
2792	    /* We need not give a valid is_set_dest argument since the case
2793	       of a constant equivalence was checked above.  */
2794	    substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
2795	      = find_reloads_toplev (recog_data.operand[i], i, address_type[i],
2796				     ind_levels, 0, insn,
2797				     &address_reloaded[i]);
2798	}
2799      /* If the operand is still a register (we didn't replace it with an
2800	 equivalent), get the preferred class to reload it into.  */
2801      code = GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]);
2802      preferred_class[i]
2803	= ((code == REG && REGNO (recog_data.operand[i])
2804	    >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2805	   ? reg_preferred_class (REGNO (recog_data.operand[i]))
2806	   : NO_REGS);
2807      pref_or_nothing[i]
2808	= (code == REG
2809	   && REGNO (recog_data.operand[i]) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2810	   && reg_alternate_class (REGNO (recog_data.operand[i])) == NO_REGS);
2811    }
2812
2813  /* If this is simply a copy from operand 1 to operand 0, merge the
2814     preferred classes for the operands.  */
2815  if (set != 0 && noperands >= 2 && recog_data.operand[0] == SET_DEST (set)
2816      && recog_data.operand[1] == SET_SRC (set))
2817    {
2818      preferred_class[0] = preferred_class[1]
2819	= reg_class_subunion[(int) preferred_class[0]][(int) preferred_class[1]];
2820      pref_or_nothing[0] |= pref_or_nothing[1];
2821      pref_or_nothing[1] |= pref_or_nothing[0];
2822    }
2823
2824  /* Now see what we need for pseudo-regs that didn't get hard regs
2825     or got the wrong kind of hard reg.  For this, we must consider
2826     all the operands together against the register constraints.  */
2827
2828  best = MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS * 2 + 600;
2829
2830  swapped = 0;
2831  goal_alternative_swapped = 0;
2832 try_swapped:
2833
2834  /* The constraints are made of several alternatives.
2835     Each operand's constraint looks like foo,bar,... with commas
2836     separating the alternatives.  The first alternatives for all
2837     operands go together, the second alternatives go together, etc.
2838
2839     First loop over alternatives.  */
2840
2841  for (this_alternative_number = 0;
2842       this_alternative_number < n_alternatives;
2843       this_alternative_number++)
2844    {
2845      /* Loop over operands for one constraint alternative.  */
2846      /* LOSERS counts those that don't fit this alternative
2847	 and would require loading.  */
2848      int losers = 0;
2849      /* BAD is set to 1 if it some operand can't fit this alternative
2850	 even after reloading.  */
2851      int bad = 0;
2852      /* REJECT is a count of how undesirable this alternative says it is
2853	 if any reloading is required.  If the alternative matches exactly
2854	 then REJECT is ignored, but otherwise it gets this much
2855	 counted against it in addition to the reloading needed.  Each
2856	 ? counts three times here since we want the disparaging caused by
2857	 a bad register class to only count 1/3 as much.  */
2858      int reject = 0;
2859
2860      this_earlyclobber = 0;
2861
2862      for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
2863	{
2864	  char *p = constraints[i];
2865	  char *end;
2866	  int len;
2867	  int win = 0;
2868	  int did_match = 0;
2869	  /* 0 => this operand can be reloaded somehow for this alternative.  */
2870	  int badop = 1;
2871	  /* 0 => this operand can be reloaded if the alternative allows regs.  */
2872	  int winreg = 0;
2873	  int c;
2874	  int m;
2875	  rtx operand = recog_data.operand[i];
2876	  int offset = 0;
2877	  /* Nonzero means this is a MEM that must be reloaded into a reg
2878	     regardless of what the constraint says.  */
2879	  int force_reload = 0;
2880	  int offmemok = 0;
2881	  /* Nonzero if a constant forced into memory would be OK for this
2882	     operand.  */
2883	  int constmemok = 0;
2884	  int earlyclobber = 0;
2885
2886	  /* If the predicate accepts a unary operator, it means that
2887	     we need to reload the operand, but do not do this for
2888	     match_operator and friends.  */
2889	  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (operand)) == '1' && *p != 0)
2890	    operand = XEXP (operand, 0);
2891
2892	  /* If the operand is a SUBREG, extract
2893	     the REG or MEM (or maybe even a constant) within.
2894	     (Constants can occur as a result of reg_equiv_constant.)  */
2895
2896	  while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
2897	    {
2898	      /* Offset only matters when operand is a REG and
2899		 it is a hard reg.  This is because it is passed
2900		 to reg_fits_class_p if it is a REG and all pseudos
2901		 return 0 from that function.  */
2902	      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (operand)) == REG
2903		  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (operand)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2904		{
2905		  if (!subreg_offset_representable_p
2906			(REGNO (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2907			 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2908			 SUBREG_BYTE (operand),
2909			 GET_MODE (operand)))
2910		     force_reload = 1;
2911		  offset += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2912						 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (operand)),
2913						 SUBREG_BYTE (operand),
2914						 GET_MODE (operand));
2915		}
2916	      operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
2917	      /* Force reload if this is a constant or PLUS or if there may
2918		 be a problem accessing OPERAND in the outer mode.  */
2919	      if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
2920		  || GET_CODE (operand) == PLUS
2921		  /* We must force a reload of paradoxical SUBREGs
2922		     of a MEM because the alignment of the inner value
2923		     may not be enough to do the outer reference.  On
2924		     big-endian machines, it may also reference outside
2925		     the object.
2926
2927		     On machines that extend byte operations and we have a
2928		     SUBREG where both the inner and outer modes are no wider
2929		     than a word and the inner mode is narrower, is integral,
2930		     and gets extended when loaded from memory, combine.c has
2931		     made assumptions about the behavior of the machine in such
2932		     register access.  If the data is, in fact, in memory we
2933		     must always load using the size assumed to be in the
2934		     register and let the insn do the different-sized
2935		     accesses.
2936
2937		     This is doubly true if WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS.  In
2938		     this case eliminate_regs has left non-paradoxical
2939		     subregs for push_reload to see.  Make sure it does
2940		     by forcing the reload.
2941
2942		     ??? When is it right at this stage to have a subreg
2943		     of a mem that is _not_ to be handled specially?  IMO
2944		     those should have been reduced to just a mem.  */
2945		  || ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
2946		       || (GET_CODE (operand)== REG
2947			   && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2948#ifndef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
2949		      && (((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (operand))
2950			    < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
2951			   && (GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i])
2952			       > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (operand))))
2953			  || BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
2954#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
2955			  || (GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i]) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
2956			      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (operand))
2957				  <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
2958			      && (GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i])
2959				  > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (operand)))
2960			      && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (operand))
2961			      && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (operand)) != NIL)
2962#endif
2963			  )
2964#endif
2965		      )
2966		  )
2967		force_reload = 1;
2968	    }
2969
2970	  this_alternative[i] = (int) NO_REGS;
2971	  this_alternative_win[i] = 0;
2972	  this_alternative_match_win[i] = 0;
2973	  this_alternative_offmemok[i] = 0;
2974	  this_alternative_earlyclobber[i] = 0;
2975	  this_alternative_matches[i] = -1;
2976
2977	  /* An empty constraint or empty alternative
2978	     allows anything which matched the pattern.  */
2979	  if (*p == 0 || *p == ',')
2980	    win = 1, badop = 0;
2981
2982	  /* Scan this alternative's specs for this operand;
2983	     set WIN if the operand fits any letter in this alternative.
2984	     Otherwise, clear BADOP if this operand could
2985	     fit some letter after reloads,
2986	     or set WINREG if this operand could fit after reloads
2987	     provided the constraint allows some registers.  */
2988
2989	  do
2990	    switch ((c = *p, len = CONSTRAINT_LEN (c, p)), c)
2991	      {
2992	      case '\0':
2993		len = 0;
2994		break;
2995	      case ',':
2996		c = '\0';
2997		break;
2998
2999	      case '=':  case '+':  case '*':
3000		break;
3001
3002	      case '%':
3003		/* We only support one commutative marker, the first
3004		   one.  We already set commutative above.  */
3005		break;
3006
3007	      case '?':
3008		reject += 6;
3009		break;
3010
3011	      case '!':
3012		reject = 600;
3013		break;
3014
3015	      case '#':
3016		/* Ignore rest of this alternative as far as
3017		   reloading is concerned.  */
3018		do
3019		  p++;
3020		while (*p && *p != ',');
3021		len = 0;
3022		break;
3023
3024	      case '0':  case '1':  case '2':  case '3':  case '4':
3025	      case '5':  case '6':  case '7':  case '8':  case '9':
3026		m = strtoul (p, &end, 10);
3027		p = end;
3028		len = 0;
3029
3030		this_alternative_matches[i] = m;
3031		/* We are supposed to match a previous operand.
3032		   If we do, we win if that one did.
3033		   If we do not, count both of the operands as losers.
3034		   (This is too conservative, since most of the time
3035		   only a single reload insn will be needed to make
3036		   the two operands win.  As a result, this alternative
3037		   may be rejected when it is actually desirable.)  */
3038		if ((swapped && (m != commutative || i != commutative + 1))
3039		    /* If we are matching as if two operands were swapped,
3040		       also pretend that operands_match had been computed
3041		       with swapped.
3042		       But if I is the second of those and C is the first,
3043		       don't exchange them, because operands_match is valid
3044		       only on one side of its diagonal.  */
3045		    ? (operands_match
3046		       [(m == commutative || m == commutative + 1)
3047		       ? 2 * commutative + 1 - m : m]
3048		       [(i == commutative || i == commutative + 1)
3049		       ? 2 * commutative + 1 - i : i])
3050		    : operands_match[m][i])
3051		  {
3052		    /* If we are matching a non-offsettable address where an
3053		       offsettable address was expected, then we must reject
3054		       this combination, because we can't reload it.  */
3055		    if (this_alternative_offmemok[m]
3056			&& GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[m]) == MEM
3057			&& this_alternative[m] == (int) NO_REGS
3058			&& ! this_alternative_win[m])
3059		      bad = 1;
3060
3061		    did_match = this_alternative_win[m];
3062		  }
3063		else
3064		  {
3065		    /* Operands don't match.  */
3066		    rtx value;
3067		    int loc1, loc2;
3068		    /* Retroactively mark the operand we had to match
3069		       as a loser, if it wasn't already.  */
3070		    if (this_alternative_win[m])
3071		      losers++;
3072		    this_alternative_win[m] = 0;
3073		    if (this_alternative[m] == (int) NO_REGS)
3074		      bad = 1;
3075		    /* But count the pair only once in the total badness of
3076		       this alternative, if the pair can be a dummy reload.
3077		       The pointers in operand_loc are not swapped; swap
3078		       them by hand if necessary.  */
3079		    if (swapped && i == commutative)
3080		      loc1 = commutative + 1;
3081		    else if (swapped && i == commutative + 1)
3082		      loc1 = commutative;
3083		    else
3084		      loc1 = i;
3085		    if (swapped && m == commutative)
3086		      loc2 = commutative + 1;
3087		    else if (swapped && m == commutative + 1)
3088		      loc2 = commutative;
3089		    else
3090		      loc2 = m;
3091		    value
3092		      = find_dummy_reload (recog_data.operand[i],
3093					   recog_data.operand[m],
3094					   recog_data.operand_loc[loc1],
3095					   recog_data.operand_loc[loc2],
3096					   operand_mode[i], operand_mode[m],
3097					   this_alternative[m], -1,
3098					   this_alternative_earlyclobber[m]);
3099
3100		    if (value != 0)
3101		      losers--;
3102		  }
3103		/* This can be fixed with reloads if the operand
3104		   we are supposed to match can be fixed with reloads.  */
3105		badop = 0;
3106		this_alternative[i] = this_alternative[m];
3107
3108		/* If we have to reload this operand and some previous
3109		   operand also had to match the same thing as this
3110		   operand, we don't know how to do that.  So reject this
3111		   alternative.  */
3112		if (! did_match || force_reload)
3113		  for (j = 0; j < i; j++)
3114		    if (this_alternative_matches[j]
3115			== this_alternative_matches[i])
3116		      badop = 1;
3117		break;
3118
3119	      case 'p':
3120		/* All necessary reloads for an address_operand
3121		   were handled in find_reloads_address.  */
3122		this_alternative[i] = (int) MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (VOIDmode);
3123		win = 1;
3124		badop = 0;
3125		break;
3126
3127	      case 'm':
3128		if (force_reload)
3129		  break;
3130		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3131		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3132			&& REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3133			&& reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0))
3134		  win = 1;
3135		if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
3136		    /* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3137		    && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH)
3138		  badop = 0;
3139		constmemok = 1;
3140		break;
3141
3142	      case '<':
3143		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3144		    && ! address_reloaded[i]
3145		    && (GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == PRE_DEC
3146			|| GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == POST_DEC))
3147		  win = 1;
3148		break;
3149
3150	      case '>':
3151		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3152		    && ! address_reloaded[i]
3153		    && (GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == PRE_INC
3154			|| GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == POST_INC))
3155		  win = 1;
3156		break;
3157
3158		/* Memory operand whose address is not offsettable.  */
3159	      case 'V':
3160		if (force_reload)
3161		  break;
3162		if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3163		    && ! (ind_levels ? offsettable_memref_p (operand)
3164			  : offsettable_nonstrict_memref_p (operand))
3165		    /* Certain mem addresses will become offsettable
3166		       after they themselves are reloaded.  This is important;
3167		       we don't want our own handling of unoffsettables
3168		       to override the handling of reg_equiv_address.  */
3169		    && !(GET_CODE (XEXP (operand, 0)) == REG
3170			 && (ind_levels == 0
3171			     || reg_equiv_address[REGNO (XEXP (operand, 0))] != 0)))
3172		  win = 1;
3173		break;
3174
3175		/* Memory operand whose address is offsettable.  */
3176	      case 'o':
3177		if (force_reload)
3178		  break;
3179		if ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3180		     /* If IND_LEVELS, find_reloads_address won't reload a
3181			pseudo that didn't get a hard reg, so we have to
3182			reject that case.  */
3183		     && ((ind_levels ? offsettable_memref_p (operand)
3184			  : offsettable_nonstrict_memref_p (operand))
3185			 /* A reloaded address is offsettable because it is now
3186			    just a simple register indirect.  */
3187			 || address_reloaded[i]))
3188		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3189			&& REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3190			&& reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0
3191			/* If reg_equiv_address is nonzero, we will be
3192			   loading it into a register; hence it will be
3193			   offsettable, but we cannot say that reg_equiv_mem
3194			   is offsettable without checking.  */
3195			&& ((reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)] != 0
3196			     && offsettable_memref_p (reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)]))
3197			    || (reg_equiv_address[REGNO (operand)] != 0))))
3198		  win = 1;
3199		/* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3200		if ((CONSTANT_P (operand) && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH)
3201		    || GET_CODE (operand) == MEM)
3202		  badop = 0;
3203		constmemok = 1;
3204		offmemok = 1;
3205		break;
3206
3207	      case '&':
3208		/* Output operand that is stored before the need for the
3209		   input operands (and their index registers) is over.  */
3210		earlyclobber = 1, this_earlyclobber = 1;
3211		break;
3212
3213	      case 'E':
3214	      case 'F':
3215		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3216		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_VECTOR
3217			&& (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (operand))
3218			    == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT)))
3219		  win = 1;
3220		break;
3221
3222	      case 'G':
3223	      case 'H':
3224		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3225		    && CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P (operand, c, p))
3226		  win = 1;
3227		break;
3228
3229	      case 's':
3230		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_INT
3231		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3232			&& GET_MODE (operand) == VOIDmode))
3233		  break;
3234	      case 'i':
3235		if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
3236#ifdef LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
3237		    && (! flag_pic || LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (operand))
3238#endif
3239		    )
3240		  win = 1;
3241		break;
3242
3243	      case 'n':
3244		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_INT
3245		    || (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_DOUBLE
3246			&& GET_MODE (operand) == VOIDmode))
3247		  win = 1;
3248		break;
3249
3250	      case 'I':
3251	      case 'J':
3252	      case 'K':
3253	      case 'L':
3254	      case 'M':
3255	      case 'N':
3256	      case 'O':
3257	      case 'P':
3258		if (GET_CODE (operand) == CONST_INT
3259		    && CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P (INTVAL (operand), c, p))
3260		  win = 1;
3261		break;
3262
3263	      case 'X':
3264		win = 1;
3265		break;
3266
3267	      case 'g':
3268		if (! force_reload
3269		    /* A PLUS is never a valid operand, but reload can make
3270		       it from a register when eliminating registers.  */
3271		    && GET_CODE (operand) != PLUS
3272		    /* A SCRATCH is not a valid operand.  */
3273		    && GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH
3274#ifdef LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
3275		    && (! CONSTANT_P (operand)
3276			|| ! flag_pic
3277			|| LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (operand))
3278#endif
3279		    && (GENERAL_REGS == ALL_REGS
3280			|| GET_CODE (operand) != REG
3281			|| (REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3282			    && reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0)))
3283		  win = 1;
3284		/* Drop through into 'r' case.  */
3285
3286	      case 'r':
3287		this_alternative[i]
3288		  = (int) reg_class_subunion[this_alternative[i]][(int) GENERAL_REGS];
3289		goto reg;
3290
3291	      default:
3292		if (REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT (c, p) == NO_REGS)
3293		  {
3294#ifdef EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR
3295		    if (EXTRA_MEMORY_CONSTRAINT (c, p))
3296		      {
3297			if (force_reload)
3298			  break;
3299		        if (EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (operand, c, p))
3300		          win = 1;
3301			/* If the address was already reloaded,
3302			   we win as well.  */
3303			else if (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3304				 && address_reloaded[i])
3305			  win = 1;
3306			/* Likewise if the address will be reloaded because
3307			   reg_equiv_address is nonzero.  For reg_equiv_mem
3308			   we have to check.  */
3309		        else if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3310				 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3311				 && reg_renumber[REGNO (operand)] < 0
3312				 && ((reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)] != 0
3313				      && EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (reg_equiv_mem[REGNO (operand)], c, p))
3314				     || (reg_equiv_address[REGNO (operand)] != 0)))
3315			  win = 1;
3316
3317			/* If we didn't already win, we can reload
3318			   constants via force_const_mem, and other
3319			   MEMs by reloading the address like for 'o'.  */
3320			if ((CONSTANT_P (operand) && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH)
3321			    || GET_CODE (operand) == MEM)
3322			  badop = 0;
3323			constmemok = 1;
3324			offmemok = 1;
3325			break;
3326		      }
3327		    if (EXTRA_ADDRESS_CONSTRAINT (c, p))
3328		      {
3329		        if (EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (operand, c, p))
3330		          win = 1;
3331
3332			/* If we didn't already win, we can reload
3333			   the address into a base register.  */
3334			this_alternative[i] = (int) MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (VOIDmode);
3335			badop = 0;
3336			break;
3337		      }
3338
3339		    if (EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (operand, c, p))
3340		      win = 1;
3341#endif
3342		    break;
3343		  }
3344
3345		this_alternative[i]
3346		  = (int) (reg_class_subunion
3347			   [this_alternative[i]]
3348			   [(int) REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT (c, p)]);
3349	      reg:
3350		if (GET_MODE (operand) == BLKmode)
3351		  break;
3352		winreg = 1;
3353		if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3354		    && reg_fits_class_p (operand, this_alternative[i],
3355					 offset, GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i])))
3356		  win = 1;
3357		break;
3358	      }
3359	  while ((p += len), c);
3360
3361	  constraints[i] = p;
3362
3363	  /* If this operand could be handled with a reg,
3364	     and some reg is allowed, then this operand can be handled.  */
3365	  if (winreg && this_alternative[i] != (int) NO_REGS)
3366	    badop = 0;
3367
3368	  /* Record which operands fit this alternative.  */
3369	  this_alternative_earlyclobber[i] = earlyclobber;
3370	  if (win && ! force_reload)
3371	    this_alternative_win[i] = 1;
3372	  else if (did_match && ! force_reload)
3373	    this_alternative_match_win[i] = 1;
3374	  else
3375	    {
3376	      int const_to_mem = 0;
3377
3378	      this_alternative_offmemok[i] = offmemok;
3379	      losers++;
3380	      if (badop)
3381		bad = 1;
3382	      /* Alternative loses if it has no regs for a reg operand.  */
3383	      if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3384		  && this_alternative[i] == (int) NO_REGS
3385		  && this_alternative_matches[i] < 0)
3386		bad = 1;
3387
3388	      /* If this is a constant that is reloaded into the desired
3389		 class by copying it to memory first, count that as another
3390		 reload.  This is consistent with other code and is
3391		 required to avoid choosing another alternative when
3392		 the constant is moved into memory by this function on
3393		 an early reload pass.  Note that the test here is
3394		 precisely the same as in the code below that calls
3395		 force_const_mem.  */
3396	      if (CONSTANT_P (operand)
3397		  /* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3398		  && GET_CODE (operand) != HIGH
3399		  && ((PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (operand,
3400					       (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i])
3401		       == NO_REGS)
3402		      || no_input_reloads)
3403		  && operand_mode[i] != VOIDmode)
3404		{
3405		  const_to_mem = 1;
3406		  if (this_alternative[i] != (int) NO_REGS)
3407		    losers++;
3408		}
3409
3410	      /* If we can't reload this value at all, reject this
3411		 alternative.  Note that we could also lose due to
3412		 LIMIT_RELOAD_RELOAD_CLASS, but we don't check that
3413		 here.  */
3414
3415	      if (! CONSTANT_P (operand)
3416		  && (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i] != NO_REGS
3417		  && (PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (operand,
3418					      (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i])
3419		      == NO_REGS))
3420		bad = 1;
3421
3422	      /* Alternative loses if it requires a type of reload not
3423		 permitted for this insn.  We can always reload SCRATCH
3424		 and objects with a REG_UNUSED note.  */
3425	      else if (GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH
3426		       && modified[i] != RELOAD_READ && no_output_reloads
3427		       && ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, operand))
3428		bad = 1;
3429	      else if (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE && no_input_reloads
3430		       && ! const_to_mem)
3431		bad = 1;
3432
3433#ifdef DISPARAGE_RELOAD_CLASS
3434	      reject
3435		+= DISPARAGE_RELOAD_CLASS (operand,
3436					   (enum reg_class) this_alternative[i]);
3437#endif
3438
3439	      /* We prefer to reload pseudos over reloading other things,
3440		 since such reloads may be able to be eliminated later.
3441		 If we are reloading a SCRATCH, we won't be generating any
3442		 insns, just using a register, so it is also preferred.
3443		 So bump REJECT in other cases.  Don't do this in the
3444		 case where we are forcing a constant into memory and
3445		 it will then win since we don't want to have a different
3446		 alternative match then.  */
3447	      if (! (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3448		     && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3449		  && GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH
3450		  && ! (const_to_mem && constmemok))
3451		reject += 2;
3452
3453	      /* Input reloads can be inherited more often than output
3454		 reloads can be removed, so penalize output reloads.  */
3455	      if (operand_type[i] != RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
3456		  && GET_CODE (operand) != SCRATCH)
3457		reject++;
3458	    }
3459
3460	  /* If this operand is a pseudo register that didn't get a hard
3461	     reg and this alternative accepts some register, see if the
3462	     class that we want is a subset of the preferred class for this
3463	     register.  If not, but it intersects that class, use the
3464	     preferred class instead.  If it does not intersect the preferred
3465	     class, show that usage of this alternative should be discouraged;
3466	     it will be discouraged more still if the register is `preferred
3467	     or nothing'.  We do this because it increases the chance of
3468	     reusing our spill register in a later insn and avoiding a pair
3469	     of memory stores and loads.
3470
3471	     Don't bother with this if this alternative will accept this
3472	     operand.
3473
3474	     Don't do this for a multiword operand, since it is only a
3475	     small win and has the risk of requiring more spill registers,
3476	     which could cause a large loss.
3477
3478	     Don't do this if the preferred class has only one register
3479	     because we might otherwise exhaust the class.  */
3480
3481	  if (! win && ! did_match
3482	      && this_alternative[i] != (int) NO_REGS
3483	      && GET_MODE_SIZE (operand_mode[i]) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
3484	      && reg_class_size[(int) preferred_class[i]] > 1)
3485	    {
3486	      if (! reg_class_subset_p (this_alternative[i],
3487					preferred_class[i]))
3488		{
3489		  /* Since we don't have a way of forming the intersection,
3490		     we just do something special if the preferred class
3491		     is a subset of the class we have; that's the most
3492		     common case anyway.  */
3493		  if (reg_class_subset_p (preferred_class[i],
3494					  this_alternative[i]))
3495		    this_alternative[i] = (int) preferred_class[i];
3496		  else
3497		    reject += (2 + 2 * pref_or_nothing[i]);
3498		}
3499	    }
3500	}
3501
3502      /* Now see if any output operands that are marked "earlyclobber"
3503	 in this alternative conflict with any input operands
3504	 or any memory addresses.  */
3505
3506      for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3507	if (this_alternative_earlyclobber[i]
3508	    && (this_alternative_win[i] || this_alternative_match_win[i]))
3509	  {
3510	    struct decomposition early_data;
3511
3512	    early_data = decompose (recog_data.operand[i]);
3513
3514	    if (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ)
3515	      abort ();
3516
3517	    if (this_alternative[i] == NO_REGS)
3518	      {
3519		this_alternative_earlyclobber[i] = 0;
3520		if (this_insn_is_asm)
3521		  error_for_asm (this_insn,
3522				 "`&' constraint used with no register class");
3523		else
3524		  abort ();
3525	      }
3526
3527	    for (j = 0; j < noperands; j++)
3528	      /* Is this an input operand or a memory ref?  */
3529	      if ((GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[j]) == MEM
3530		   || modified[j] != RELOAD_WRITE)
3531		  && j != i
3532		  /* Ignore things like match_operator operands.  */
3533		  && *recog_data.constraints[j] != 0
3534		  /* Don't count an input operand that is constrained to match
3535		     the early clobber operand.  */
3536		  && ! (this_alternative_matches[j] == i
3537			&& rtx_equal_p (recog_data.operand[i],
3538					recog_data.operand[j]))
3539		  /* Is it altered by storing the earlyclobber operand?  */
3540		  && !immune_p (recog_data.operand[j], recog_data.operand[i],
3541				early_data))
3542		{
3543		  /* If the output is in a single-reg class,
3544		     it's costly to reload it, so reload the input instead.  */
3545		  if (reg_class_size[this_alternative[i]] == 1
3546		      && (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[j]) == REG
3547			  || GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[j]) == SUBREG))
3548		    {
3549		      losers++;
3550		      this_alternative_win[j] = 0;
3551		      this_alternative_match_win[j] = 0;
3552		    }
3553		  else
3554		    break;
3555		}
3556	    /* If an earlyclobber operand conflicts with something,
3557	       it must be reloaded, so request this and count the cost.  */
3558	    if (j != noperands)
3559	      {
3560		losers++;
3561		this_alternative_win[i] = 0;
3562		this_alternative_match_win[j] = 0;
3563		for (j = 0; j < noperands; j++)
3564		  if (this_alternative_matches[j] == i
3565		      && this_alternative_match_win[j])
3566		    {
3567		      this_alternative_win[j] = 0;
3568		      this_alternative_match_win[j] = 0;
3569		      losers++;
3570		    }
3571	      }
3572	  }
3573
3574      /* If one alternative accepts all the operands, no reload required,
3575	 choose that alternative; don't consider the remaining ones.  */
3576      if (losers == 0)
3577	{
3578	  /* Unswap these so that they are never swapped at `finish'.  */
3579	  if (commutative >= 0)
3580	    {
3581	      recog_data.operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative];
3582	      recog_data.operand[commutative + 1]
3583		= substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3584	    }
3585	  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3586	    {
3587	      goal_alternative_win[i] = this_alternative_win[i];
3588	      goal_alternative_match_win[i] = this_alternative_match_win[i];
3589	      goal_alternative[i] = this_alternative[i];
3590	      goal_alternative_offmemok[i] = this_alternative_offmemok[i];
3591	      goal_alternative_matches[i] = this_alternative_matches[i];
3592	      goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i]
3593		= this_alternative_earlyclobber[i];
3594	    }
3595	  goal_alternative_number = this_alternative_number;
3596	  goal_alternative_swapped = swapped;
3597	  goal_earlyclobber = this_earlyclobber;
3598	  goto finish;
3599	}
3600
3601      /* REJECT, set by the ! and ? constraint characters and when a register
3602	 would be reloaded into a non-preferred class, discourages the use of
3603	 this alternative for a reload goal.  REJECT is incremented by six
3604	 for each ? and two for each non-preferred class.  */
3605      losers = losers * 6 + reject;
3606
3607      /* If this alternative can be made to work by reloading,
3608	 and it needs less reloading than the others checked so far,
3609	 record it as the chosen goal for reloading.  */
3610      if (! bad && best > losers)
3611	{
3612	  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3613	    {
3614	      goal_alternative[i] = this_alternative[i];
3615	      goal_alternative_win[i] = this_alternative_win[i];
3616	      goal_alternative_match_win[i] = this_alternative_match_win[i];
3617	      goal_alternative_offmemok[i] = this_alternative_offmemok[i];
3618	      goal_alternative_matches[i] = this_alternative_matches[i];
3619	      goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i]
3620		= this_alternative_earlyclobber[i];
3621	    }
3622	  goal_alternative_swapped = swapped;
3623	  best = losers;
3624	  goal_alternative_number = this_alternative_number;
3625	  goal_earlyclobber = this_earlyclobber;
3626	}
3627    }
3628
3629  /* If insn is commutative (it's safe to exchange a certain pair of operands)
3630     then we need to try each alternative twice,
3631     the second time matching those two operands
3632     as if we had exchanged them.
3633     To do this, really exchange them in operands.
3634
3635     If we have just tried the alternatives the second time,
3636     return operands to normal and drop through.  */
3637
3638  if (commutative >= 0)
3639    {
3640      swapped = !swapped;
3641      if (swapped)
3642	{
3643	  enum reg_class tclass;
3644	  int t;
3645
3646	  recog_data.operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3647	  recog_data.operand[commutative + 1] = substed_operand[commutative];
3648	  /* Swap the duplicates too.  */
3649	  for (i = 0; i < recog_data.n_dups; i++)
3650	    if (recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative
3651		|| recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative + 1)
3652	      *recog_data.dup_loc[i]
3653		 = recog_data.operand[(int) recog_data.dup_num[i]];
3654
3655	  tclass = preferred_class[commutative];
3656	  preferred_class[commutative] = preferred_class[commutative + 1];
3657	  preferred_class[commutative + 1] = tclass;
3658
3659	  t = pref_or_nothing[commutative];
3660	  pref_or_nothing[commutative] = pref_or_nothing[commutative + 1];
3661	  pref_or_nothing[commutative + 1] = t;
3662
3663	  memcpy (constraints, recog_data.constraints,
3664		  noperands * sizeof (char *));
3665	  goto try_swapped;
3666	}
3667      else
3668	{
3669	  recog_data.operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative];
3670	  recog_data.operand[commutative + 1]
3671	    = substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3672	  /* Unswap the duplicates too.  */
3673	  for (i = 0; i < recog_data.n_dups; i++)
3674	    if (recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative
3675		|| recog_data.dup_num[i] == commutative + 1)
3676	      *recog_data.dup_loc[i]
3677		 = recog_data.operand[(int) recog_data.dup_num[i]];
3678	}
3679    }
3680
3681  /* The operands don't meet the constraints.
3682     goal_alternative describes the alternative
3683     that we could reach by reloading the fewest operands.
3684     Reload so as to fit it.  */
3685
3686  if (best == MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS * 2 + 600)
3687    {
3688      /* No alternative works with reloads??  */
3689      if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3690	fatal_insn ("unable to generate reloads for:", insn);
3691      error_for_asm (insn, "inconsistent operand constraints in an `asm'");
3692      /* Avoid further trouble with this insn.  */
3693      PATTERN (insn) = gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
3694      n_reloads = 0;
3695      return 0;
3696    }
3697
3698  /* Jump to `finish' from above if all operands are valid already.
3699     In that case, goal_alternative_win is all 1.  */
3700 finish:
3701
3702  /* Right now, for any pair of operands I and J that are required to match,
3703     with I < J,
3704     goal_alternative_matches[J] is I.
3705     Set up goal_alternative_matched as the inverse function:
3706     goal_alternative_matched[I] = J.  */
3707
3708  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3709    goal_alternative_matched[i] = -1;
3710
3711  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3712    if (! goal_alternative_win[i]
3713	&& goal_alternative_matches[i] >= 0)
3714      goal_alternative_matched[goal_alternative_matches[i]] = i;
3715
3716  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3717    goal_alternative_win[i] |= goal_alternative_match_win[i];
3718
3719  /* If the best alternative is with operands 1 and 2 swapped,
3720     consider them swapped before reporting the reloads.  Update the
3721     operand numbers of any reloads already pushed.  */
3722
3723  if (goal_alternative_swapped)
3724    {
3725      rtx tem;
3726
3727      tem = substed_operand[commutative];
3728      substed_operand[commutative] = substed_operand[commutative + 1];
3729      substed_operand[commutative + 1] = tem;
3730      tem = recog_data.operand[commutative];
3731      recog_data.operand[commutative] = recog_data.operand[commutative + 1];
3732      recog_data.operand[commutative + 1] = tem;
3733      tem = *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative];
3734      *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative]
3735	= *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative + 1];
3736      *recog_data.operand_loc[commutative + 1] = tem;
3737
3738      for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
3739	{
3740	  if (rld[i].opnum == commutative)
3741	    rld[i].opnum = commutative + 1;
3742	  else if (rld[i].opnum == commutative + 1)
3743	    rld[i].opnum = commutative;
3744	}
3745    }
3746
3747  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3748    {
3749      operand_reloadnum[i] = -1;
3750
3751      /* If this is an earlyclobber operand, we need to widen the scope.
3752	 The reload must remain valid from the start of the insn being
3753	 reloaded until after the operand is stored into its destination.
3754	 We approximate this with RELOAD_OTHER even though we know that we
3755	 do not conflict with RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS reloads.
3756
3757	 One special case that is worth checking is when we have an
3758	 output that is earlyclobber but isn't used past the insn (typically
3759	 a SCRATCH).  In this case, we only need have the reload live
3760	 through the insn itself, but not for any of our input or output
3761	 reloads.
3762	 But we must not accidentally narrow the scope of an existing
3763	 RELOAD_OTHER reload - leave these alone.
3764
3765	 In any case, anything needed to address this operand can remain
3766	 however they were previously categorized.  */
3767
3768      if (goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i] && operand_type[i] != RELOAD_OTHER)
3769	operand_type[i]
3770	  = (find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, recog_data.operand[i])
3771	     ? RELOAD_FOR_INSN : RELOAD_OTHER);
3772    }
3773
3774  /* Any constants that aren't allowed and can't be reloaded
3775     into registers are here changed into memory references.  */
3776  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3777    if (! goal_alternative_win[i]
3778	&& CONSTANT_P (recog_data.operand[i])
3779	/* force_const_mem does not accept HIGH.  */
3780	&& GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) != HIGH
3781	&& ((PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (recog_data.operand[i],
3782				     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i])
3783	     == NO_REGS)
3784	    || no_input_reloads)
3785	&& operand_mode[i] != VOIDmode)
3786      {
3787	substed_operand[i] = recog_data.operand[i]
3788	  = find_reloads_toplev (force_const_mem (operand_mode[i],
3789						  recog_data.operand[i]),
3790				 i, address_type[i], ind_levels, 0, insn,
3791				 NULL);
3792	if (alternative_allows_memconst (recog_data.constraints[i],
3793					 goal_alternative_number))
3794	  goal_alternative_win[i] = 1;
3795      }
3796
3797  /* Record the values of the earlyclobber operands for the caller.  */
3798  if (goal_earlyclobber)
3799    for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3800      if (goal_alternative_earlyclobber[i])
3801	reload_earlyclobbers[n_earlyclobbers++] = recog_data.operand[i];
3802
3803  /* Now record reloads for all the operands that need them.  */
3804  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
3805    if (! goal_alternative_win[i])
3806      {
3807	/* Operands that match previous ones have already been handled.  */
3808	if (goal_alternative_matches[i] >= 0)
3809	  ;
3810	/* Handle an operand with a nonoffsettable address
3811	   appearing where an offsettable address will do
3812	   by reloading the address into a base register.
3813
3814	   ??? We can also do this when the operand is a register and
3815	   reg_equiv_mem is not offsettable, but this is a bit tricky,
3816	   so we don't bother with it.  It may not be worth doing.  */
3817	else if (goal_alternative_matched[i] == -1
3818		 && goal_alternative_offmemok[i]
3819		 && GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == MEM)
3820	  {
3821	    operand_reloadnum[i]
3822	      = push_reload (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), NULL_RTX,
3823			     &XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), (rtx*) 0,
3824			     MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (VOIDmode),
3825			     GET_MODE (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0)),
3826			     VOIDmode, 0, 0, i, RELOAD_FOR_INPUT);
3827	    rld[operand_reloadnum[i]].inc
3828	      = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (recog_data.operand[i]));
3829
3830	    /* If this operand is an output, we will have made any
3831	       reloads for its address as RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS, but
3832	       now we are treating part of the operand as an input, so
3833	       we must change these to RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS.  */
3834
3835	    if (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE)
3836	      {
3837		for (j = 0; j < n_reloads; j++)
3838		  {
3839		    if (rld[j].opnum == i)
3840		      {
3841			if (rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS)
3842			  rld[j].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS;
3843			else if (rld[j].when_needed
3844				 == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
3845			  rld[j].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS;
3846		      }
3847		  }
3848	      }
3849	  }
3850	else if (goal_alternative_matched[i] == -1)
3851	  {
3852	    operand_reloadnum[i]
3853	      = push_reload ((modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3854			      ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3855			     (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3856			      ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3857			     (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3858			      ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3859			     (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3860			      ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3861			     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3862			     (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE
3863			      ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3864			     (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3865			      ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3866			     (insn_code_number < 0 ? 0
3867			      : insn_data[insn_code_number].operand[i].strict_low),
3868			     0, i, operand_type[i]);
3869	  }
3870	/* In a matching pair of operands, one must be input only
3871	   and the other must be output only.
3872	   Pass the input operand as IN and the other as OUT.  */
3873	else if (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3874		 && modified[goal_alternative_matched[i]] == RELOAD_WRITE)
3875	  {
3876	    operand_reloadnum[i]
3877	      = push_reload (recog_data.operand[i],
3878			     recog_data.operand[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3879			     recog_data.operand_loc[i],
3880			     recog_data.operand_loc[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3881			     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3882			     operand_mode[i],
3883			     operand_mode[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3884			     0, 0, i, RELOAD_OTHER);
3885	    operand_reloadnum[goal_alternative_matched[i]] = output_reloadnum;
3886	  }
3887	else if (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE
3888		 && modified[goal_alternative_matched[i]] == RELOAD_READ)
3889	  {
3890	    operand_reloadnum[goal_alternative_matched[i]]
3891	      = push_reload (recog_data.operand[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3892			     recog_data.operand[i],
3893			     recog_data.operand_loc[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3894			     recog_data.operand_loc[i],
3895			     (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3896			     operand_mode[goal_alternative_matched[i]],
3897			     operand_mode[i],
3898			     0, 0, i, RELOAD_OTHER);
3899	    operand_reloadnum[i] = output_reloadnum;
3900	  }
3901	else if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3902	  abort ();
3903	else
3904	  {
3905	    error_for_asm (insn, "inconsistent operand constraints in an `asm'");
3906	    /* Avoid further trouble with this insn.  */
3907	    PATTERN (insn) = gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
3908	    n_reloads = 0;
3909	    return 0;
3910	  }
3911      }
3912    else if (goal_alternative_matched[i] < 0
3913	     && goal_alternative_matches[i] < 0
3914	     && !address_operand_reloaded[i]
3915	     && optimize)
3916      {
3917	/* For each non-matching operand that's a MEM or a pseudo-register
3918	   that didn't get a hard register, make an optional reload.
3919	   This may get done even if the insn needs no reloads otherwise.  */
3920
3921	rtx operand = recog_data.operand[i];
3922
3923	while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
3924	  operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
3925	if ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3926	     || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3927		 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
3928	    /* If this is only for an output, the optional reload would not
3929	       actually cause us to use a register now, just note that
3930	       something is stored here.  */
3931	    && ((enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i] != NO_REGS
3932		|| modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE)
3933	    && ! no_input_reloads
3934	    /* An optional output reload might allow to delete INSN later.
3935	       We mustn't make in-out reloads on insns that are not permitted
3936	       output reloads.
3937	       If this is an asm, we can't delete it; we must not even call
3938	       push_reload for an optional output reload in this case,
3939	       because we can't be sure that the constraint allows a register,
3940	       and push_reload verifies the constraints for asms.  */
3941	    && (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3942		|| (! no_output_reloads && ! this_insn_is_asm)))
3943	  operand_reloadnum[i]
3944	    = push_reload ((modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3945			    ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3946			   (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3947			    ? recog_data.operand[i] : 0),
3948			   (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE
3949			    ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3950			   (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ
3951			    ? recog_data.operand_loc[i] : 0),
3952			   (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[i],
3953			   (modified[i] == RELOAD_WRITE
3954			    ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3955			   (modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3956			    ? VOIDmode : operand_mode[i]),
3957			   (insn_code_number < 0 ? 0
3958			    : insn_data[insn_code_number].operand[i].strict_low),
3959			   1, i, operand_type[i]);
3960	/* If a memory reference remains (either as a MEM or a pseudo that
3961	   did not get a hard register), yet we can't make an optional
3962	   reload, check if this is actually a pseudo register reference;
3963	   we then need to emit a USE and/or a CLOBBER so that reload
3964	   inheritance will do the right thing.  */
3965	else if (replace
3966		 && (GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
3967		     || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
3968			 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3969			 && reg_renumber [REGNO (operand)] < 0)))
3970	  {
3971	    operand = *recog_data.operand_loc[i];
3972
3973	    while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
3974	      operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
3975	    if (GET_CODE (operand) == REG)
3976	      {
3977		if (modified[i] != RELOAD_WRITE)
3978		  /* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize
3979		     it as one that can be safely deleted at the end
3980		     of reload.  */
3981		  PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, operand),
3982					      insn), QImode);
3983		if (modified[i] != RELOAD_READ)
3984		  emit_insn_after (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, operand), insn);
3985	      }
3986	  }
3987      }
3988    else if (goal_alternative_matches[i] >= 0
3989	     && goal_alternative_win[goal_alternative_matches[i]]
3990	     && modified[i] == RELOAD_READ
3991	     && modified[goal_alternative_matches[i]] == RELOAD_WRITE
3992	     && ! no_input_reloads && ! no_output_reloads
3993	     && optimize)
3994      {
3995	/* Similarly, make an optional reload for a pair of matching
3996	   objects that are in MEM or a pseudo that didn't get a hard reg.  */
3997
3998	rtx operand = recog_data.operand[i];
3999
4000	while (GET_CODE (operand) == SUBREG)
4001	  operand = SUBREG_REG (operand);
4002	if ((GET_CODE (operand) == MEM
4003	     || (GET_CODE (operand) == REG
4004		 && REGNO (operand) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
4005	    && ((enum reg_class) goal_alternative[goal_alternative_matches[i]]
4006		!= NO_REGS))
4007	  operand_reloadnum[i] = operand_reloadnum[goal_alternative_matches[i]]
4008	    = push_reload (recog_data.operand[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
4009			   recog_data.operand[i],
4010			   recog_data.operand_loc[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
4011			   recog_data.operand_loc[i],
4012			   (enum reg_class) goal_alternative[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
4013			   operand_mode[goal_alternative_matches[i]],
4014			   operand_mode[i],
4015			   0, 1, goal_alternative_matches[i], RELOAD_OTHER);
4016      }
4017
4018  /* Perform whatever substitutions on the operands we are supposed
4019     to make due to commutativity or replacement of registers
4020     with equivalent constants or memory slots.  */
4021
4022  for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
4023    {
4024      /* We only do this on the last pass through reload, because it is
4025	 possible for some data (like reg_equiv_address) to be changed during
4026	 later passes.  Moreover, we loose the opportunity to get a useful
4027	 reload_{in,out}_reg when we do these replacements.  */
4028
4029      if (replace)
4030	{
4031	  rtx substitution = substed_operand[i];
4032
4033	  *recog_data.operand_loc[i] = substitution;
4034
4035	  /* If we're replacing an operand with a LABEL_REF, we need
4036	     to make sure that there's a REG_LABEL note attached to
4037	     this instruction.  */
4038	  if (GET_CODE (insn) != JUMP_INSN
4039	      && GET_CODE (substitution) == LABEL_REF
4040	      && !find_reg_note (insn, REG_LABEL, XEXP (substitution, 0)))
4041	    REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_INSN_LIST (REG_LABEL,
4042						  XEXP (substitution, 0),
4043						  REG_NOTES (insn));
4044	}
4045      else
4046	retval |= (substed_operand[i] != *recog_data.operand_loc[i]);
4047    }
4048
4049  /* If this insn pattern contains any MATCH_DUP's, make sure that
4050     they will be substituted if the operands they match are substituted.
4051     Also do now any substitutions we already did on the operands.
4052
4053     Don't do this if we aren't making replacements because we might be
4054     propagating things allocated by frame pointer elimination into places
4055     it doesn't expect.  */
4056
4057  if (insn_code_number >= 0 && replace)
4058    for (i = insn_data[insn_code_number].n_dups - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4059      {
4060	int opno = recog_data.dup_num[i];
4061	*recog_data.dup_loc[i] = *recog_data.operand_loc[opno];
4062	dup_replacements (recog_data.dup_loc[i], recog_data.operand_loc[opno]);
4063      }
4064
4065#if 0
4066  /* This loses because reloading of prior insns can invalidate the equivalence
4067     (or at least find_equiv_reg isn't smart enough to find it any more),
4068     causing this insn to need more reload regs than it needed before.
4069     It may be too late to make the reload regs available.
4070     Now this optimization is done safely in choose_reload_regs.  */
4071
4072  /* For each reload of a reg into some other class of reg,
4073     search for an existing equivalent reg (same value now) in the right class.
4074     We can use it as long as we don't need to change its contents.  */
4075  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4076    if (rld[i].reg_rtx == 0
4077	&& rld[i].in != 0
4078	&& GET_CODE (rld[i].in) == REG
4079	&& rld[i].out == 0)
4080      {
4081	rld[i].reg_rtx
4082	  = find_equiv_reg (rld[i].in, insn, rld[i].class, -1,
4083			    static_reload_reg_p, 0, rld[i].inmode);
4084	/* Prevent generation of insn to load the value
4085	   because the one we found already has the value.  */
4086	if (rld[i].reg_rtx)
4087	  rld[i].in = rld[i].reg_rtx;
4088      }
4089#endif
4090
4091  /* Perhaps an output reload can be combined with another
4092     to reduce needs by one.  */
4093  if (!goal_earlyclobber)
4094    combine_reloads ();
4095
4096  /* If we have a pair of reloads for parts of an address, they are reloading
4097     the same object, the operands themselves were not reloaded, and they
4098     are for two operands that are supposed to match, merge the reloads and
4099     change the type of the surviving reload to RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS.  */
4100
4101  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4102    {
4103      int k;
4104
4105      for (j = i + 1; j < n_reloads; j++)
4106	if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4107	     || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4108	     || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4109	     || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4110	    && (rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4111		|| rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4112		|| rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4113		|| rld[j].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4114	    && rtx_equal_p (rld[i].in, rld[j].in)
4115	    && (operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum] < 0
4116		|| rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum]].optional)
4117	    && (operand_reloadnum[rld[j].opnum] < 0
4118		|| rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[j].opnum]].optional)
4119	    && (goal_alternative_matches[rld[i].opnum] == rld[j].opnum
4120		|| (goal_alternative_matches[rld[j].opnum]
4121		    == rld[i].opnum)))
4122	  {
4123	    for (k = 0; k < n_replacements; k++)
4124	      if (replacements[k].what == j)
4125		replacements[k].what = i;
4126
4127	    if (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4128		|| rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4129	      rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4130	    else
4131	      rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS;
4132	    rld[j].in = 0;
4133	  }
4134    }
4135
4136  /* Scan all the reloads and update their type.
4137     If a reload is for the address of an operand and we didn't reload
4138     that operand, change the type.  Similarly, change the operand number
4139     of a reload when two operands match.  If a reload is optional, treat it
4140     as though the operand isn't reloaded.
4141
4142     ??? This latter case is somewhat odd because if we do the optional
4143     reload, it means the object is hanging around.  Thus we need only
4144     do the address reload if the optional reload was NOT done.
4145
4146     Change secondary reloads to be the address type of their operand, not
4147     the normal type.
4148
4149     If an operand's reload is now RELOAD_OTHER, change any
4150     RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS reloads of that operand to
4151     RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS.  */
4152
4153  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4154    {
4155      if (rld[i].secondary_p
4156	  && rld[i].when_needed == operand_type[rld[i].opnum])
4157	rld[i].when_needed = address_type[rld[i].opnum];
4158
4159      if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4160	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4161	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4162	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4163	  && (operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum] < 0
4164	      || rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum]].optional))
4165	{
4166	  /* If we have a secondary reload to go along with this reload,
4167	     change its type to RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR.  */
4168
4169	  if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4170	       || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS)
4171	      && rld[i].secondary_in_reload != -1)
4172	    {
4173	      int secondary_in_reload = rld[i].secondary_in_reload;
4174
4175	      rld[secondary_in_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4176
4177	      /* If there's a tertiary reload we have to change it also.  */
4178	      if (secondary_in_reload > 0
4179		  && rld[secondary_in_reload].secondary_in_reload != -1)
4180		rld[rld[secondary_in_reload].secondary_in_reload].when_needed
4181		  = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4182	    }
4183
4184	  if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
4185	       || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4186	      && rld[i].secondary_out_reload != -1)
4187	    {
4188	      int secondary_out_reload = rld[i].secondary_out_reload;
4189
4190	      rld[secondary_out_reload].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4191
4192	      /* If there's a tertiary reload we have to change it also.  */
4193	      if (secondary_out_reload
4194		  && rld[secondary_out_reload].secondary_out_reload != -1)
4195		rld[rld[secondary_out_reload].secondary_out_reload].when_needed
4196		  = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4197	    }
4198
4199	  if (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS
4200	      || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS)
4201	    rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR;
4202	  else
4203	    rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS;
4204	}
4205
4206      if ((rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS
4207	   || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS)
4208	  && operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum] >= 0
4209	  && (rld[operand_reloadnum[rld[i].opnum]].when_needed
4210	      == RELOAD_OTHER))
4211	rld[i].when_needed = RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS;
4212
4213      if (goal_alternative_matches[rld[i].opnum] >= 0)
4214	rld[i].opnum = goal_alternative_matches[rld[i].opnum];
4215    }
4216
4217  /* Scan all the reloads, and check for RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.
4218     If we have more than one, then convert all RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR
4219     reloads to RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.
4220
4221     choose_reload_regs assumes that RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR reloads never
4222     conflict with RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.  This is true for a
4223     single pair of RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR/RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads.
4224     However, if there is more than one RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reload,
4225     then a RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR reload conflicts with all
4226     RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reloads other than the one that uses it.
4227     This is complicated by the fact that a single operand can have more
4228     than one RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS reload.  It is very difficult to fix
4229     choose_reload_regs without affecting code quality, and cases that
4230     actually fail are extremely rare, so it turns out to be better to fix
4231     the problem here by not generating cases that choose_reload_regs will
4232     fail for.  */
4233  /* There is a similar problem with RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS /
4234     RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS when there is more than one of a kind for
4235     a single operand.
4236     We can reduce the register pressure by exploiting that a
4237     RELOAD_FOR_X_ADDR_ADDR that precedes all RELOAD_FOR_X_ADDRESS reloads
4238     does not conflict with any of them, if it is only used for the first of
4239     the RELOAD_FOR_X_ADDRESS reloads.  */
4240  {
4241    int first_op_addr_num = -2;
4242    int first_inpaddr_num[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
4243    int first_outpaddr_num[MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS];
4244    int need_change = 0;
4245    /* We use last_op_addr_reload and the contents of the above arrays
4246       first as flags - -2 means no instance encountered, -1 means exactly
4247       one instance encountered.
4248       If more than one instance has been encountered, we store the reload
4249       number of the first reload of the kind in question; reload numbers
4250       are known to be non-negative.  */
4251    for (i = 0; i < noperands; i++)
4252      first_inpaddr_num[i] = first_outpaddr_num[i] = -2;
4253    for (i = n_reloads - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4254      {
4255	switch (rld[i].when_needed)
4256	  {
4257	  case RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS:
4258	    if (++first_op_addr_num >= 0)
4259	      {
4260		first_op_addr_num = i;
4261		need_change = 1;
4262	      }
4263	    break;
4264	  case RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS:
4265	    if (++first_inpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] >= 0)
4266	      {
4267		first_inpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] = i;
4268		need_change = 1;
4269	      }
4270	    break;
4271	  case RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS:
4272	    if (++first_outpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] >= 0)
4273	      {
4274		first_outpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum] = i;
4275		need_change = 1;
4276	      }
4277	    break;
4278	  default:
4279	    break;
4280	  }
4281      }
4282
4283    if (need_change)
4284      {
4285	for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4286	  {
4287	    int first_num;
4288	    enum reload_type type;
4289
4290	    switch (rld[i].when_needed)
4291	      {
4292	      case RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR:
4293		first_num = first_op_addr_num;
4294		type = RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS;
4295		break;
4296	      case RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS:
4297		first_num = first_inpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum];
4298		type = RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS;
4299		break;
4300	      case RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS:
4301		first_num = first_outpaddr_num[rld[i].opnum];
4302		type = RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS;
4303		break;
4304	      default:
4305		continue;
4306	      }
4307	    if (first_num < 0)
4308	      continue;
4309	    else if (i > first_num)
4310	      rld[i].when_needed = type;
4311	    else
4312	      {
4313		/* Check if the only TYPE reload that uses reload I is
4314		   reload FIRST_NUM.  */
4315		for (j = n_reloads - 1; j > first_num; j--)
4316		  {
4317		    if (rld[j].when_needed == type
4318			&& (rld[i].secondary_p
4319			    ? rld[j].secondary_in_reload == i
4320			    : reg_mentioned_p (rld[i].in, rld[j].in)))
4321		      {
4322			rld[i].when_needed = type;
4323			break;
4324		      }
4325		  }
4326	      }
4327	  }
4328      }
4329  }
4330
4331  /* See if we have any reloads that are now allowed to be merged
4332     because we've changed when the reload is needed to
4333     RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS or RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS.  Only
4334     check for the most common cases.  */
4335
4336  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4337    if (rld[i].in != 0 && rld[i].out == 0
4338	&& (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS
4339	    || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR
4340	    || rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS))
4341      for (j = 0; j < n_reloads; j++)
4342	if (i != j && rld[j].in != 0 && rld[j].out == 0
4343	    && rld[j].when_needed == rld[i].when_needed
4344	    && MATCHES (rld[i].in, rld[j].in)
4345	    && rld[i].class == rld[j].class
4346	    && !rld[i].nocombine && !rld[j].nocombine
4347	    && rld[i].reg_rtx == rld[j].reg_rtx)
4348	  {
4349	    rld[i].opnum = MIN (rld[i].opnum, rld[j].opnum);
4350	    transfer_replacements (i, j);
4351	    rld[j].in = 0;
4352	  }
4353
4354#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4355  /* If we made any reloads for addresses, see if they violate a
4356     "no input reloads" requirement for this insn.  But loads that we
4357     do after the insn (such as for output addresses) are fine.  */
4358  if (no_input_reloads)
4359    for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4360      if (rld[i].in != 0
4361	  && rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS
4362	  && rld[i].when_needed != RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS)
4363	abort ();
4364#endif
4365
4366  /* Compute reload_mode and reload_nregs.  */
4367  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4368    {
4369      rld[i].mode
4370	= (rld[i].inmode == VOIDmode
4371	   || (GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].outmode)
4372	       > GET_MODE_SIZE (rld[i].inmode)))
4373	  ? rld[i].outmode : rld[i].inmode;
4374
4375      rld[i].nregs = CLASS_MAX_NREGS (rld[i].class, rld[i].mode);
4376    }
4377
4378  /* Special case a simple move with an input reload and a
4379     destination of a hard reg, if the hard reg is ok, use it.  */
4380  for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
4381    if (rld[i].when_needed == RELOAD_FOR_INPUT
4382	&& GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
4383	&& GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
4384	&& SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)) == rld[i].in)
4385      {
4386	rtx dest = SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn));
4387	unsigned int regno = REGNO (dest);
4388
4389	if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4390	    && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[rld[i].class], regno)
4391	    && HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, rld[i].mode))
4392	  {
4393	    int nr = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, rld[i].mode);
4394	    int ok = 1, nri;
4395
4396	    for (nri = 1; nri < nr; nri ++)
4397	      if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[rld[i].class], regno + nri))
4398		ok = 0;
4399
4400	    if (ok)
4401	      rld[i].reg_rtx = dest;
4402	  }
4403      }
4404
4405  return retval;
4406}
4407
4408/* Return 1 if alternative number ALTNUM in constraint-string CONSTRAINT
4409   accepts a memory operand with constant address.  */
4410
4411static int
4412alternative_allows_memconst (const char *constraint, int altnum)
4413{
4414  int c;
4415  /* Skip alternatives before the one requested.  */
4416  while (altnum > 0)
4417    {
4418      while (*constraint++ != ',');
4419      altnum--;
4420    }
4421  /* Scan the requested alternative for 'm' or 'o'.
4422     If one of them is present, this alternative accepts memory constants.  */
4423  for (; (c = *constraint) && c != ',' && c != '#';
4424       constraint += CONSTRAINT_LEN (c, constraint))
4425    if (c == 'm' || c == 'o' || EXTRA_MEMORY_CONSTRAINT (c, constraint))
4426      return 1;
4427  return 0;
4428}
4429
4430/* Scan X for memory references and scan the addresses for reloading.
4431   Also checks for references to "constant" regs that we want to eliminate
4432   and replaces them with the values they stand for.
4433   We may alter X destructively if it contains a reference to such.
4434   If X is just a constant reg, we return the equivalent value
4435   instead of X.
4436
4437   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing this machine
4438   supports.
4439
4440   OPNUM and TYPE identify the purpose of the reload.
4441
4442   IS_SET_DEST is true if X is the destination of a SET, which is not
4443   appropriate to be replaced by a constant.
4444
4445   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
4446   to determine if we may generate output reloads, and where to put USEs
4447   for pseudos that we have to replace with stack slots.
4448
4449   ADDRESS_RELOADED.  If nonzero, is a pointer to where we put the
4450   result of find_reloads_address.  */
4451
4452static rtx
4453find_reloads_toplev (rtx x, int opnum, enum reload_type type,
4454		     int ind_levels, int is_set_dest, rtx insn,
4455		     int *address_reloaded)
4456{
4457  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
4458
4459  const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4460  int i;
4461  int copied;
4462
4463  if (code == REG)
4464    {
4465      /* This code is duplicated for speed in find_reloads.  */
4466      int regno = REGNO (x);
4467      if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0 && !is_set_dest)
4468	x = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
4469#if 0
4470      /*  This creates (subreg (mem...)) which would cause an unnecessary
4471	  reload of the mem.  */
4472      else if (reg_equiv_mem[regno] != 0)
4473	x = reg_equiv_mem[regno];
4474#endif
4475      else if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno]
4476	       && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
4477	{
4478	  rtx mem = make_memloc (x, regno);
4479	  if (reg_equiv_address[regno]
4480	      || ! rtx_equal_p (mem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
4481	    {
4482	      /* If this is not a toplevel operand, find_reloads doesn't see
4483		 this substitution.  We have to emit a USE of the pseudo so
4484		 that delete_output_reload can see it.  */
4485	      if (replace_reloads && recog_data.operand[opnum] != x)
4486		/* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize it
4487		   as one that can be safely deleted at the end of
4488		   reload.  */
4489		PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, x), insn),
4490			  QImode);
4491	      x = mem;
4492	      i = find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &x, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
4493					opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
4494	      if (address_reloaded)
4495		*address_reloaded = i;
4496	    }
4497	}
4498      return x;
4499    }
4500  if (code == MEM)
4501    {
4502      rtx tem = x;
4503
4504      i = find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &tem, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
4505				opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
4506      if (address_reloaded)
4507	*address_reloaded = i;
4508
4509      return tem;
4510    }
4511
4512  if (code == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG)
4513    {
4514      /* Check for SUBREG containing a REG that's equivalent to a constant.
4515	 If the constant has a known value, truncate it right now.
4516	 Similarly if we are extracting a single-word of a multi-word
4517	 constant.  If the constant is symbolic, allow it to be substituted
4518	 normally.  push_reload will strip the subreg later.  If the
4519	 constant is VOIDmode, abort because we will lose the mode of
4520	 the register (this should never happen because one of the cases
4521	 above should handle it).  */
4522
4523      int regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
4524      rtx tem;
4525
4526      if (subreg_lowpart_p (x)
4527	  && regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
4528	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0
4529	  && (tem = gen_lowpart_common (GET_MODE (x),
4530					reg_equiv_constant[regno])) != 0)
4531	return tem;
4532
4533      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
4534	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
4535	{
4536	  tem =
4537	    simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (x), reg_equiv_constant[regno],
4538				 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
4539	  if (!tem)
4540	    abort ();
4541	  return tem;
4542	}
4543
4544      /* If the subreg contains a reg that will be converted to a mem,
4545	 convert the subreg to a narrower memref now.
4546	 Otherwise, we would get (subreg (mem ...) ...),
4547	 which would force reload of the mem.
4548
4549	 We also need to do this if there is an equivalent MEM that is
4550	 not offsettable.  In that case, alter_subreg would produce an
4551	 invalid address on big-endian machines.
4552
4553	 For machines that extend byte loads, we must not reload using
4554	 a wider mode if we have a paradoxical SUBREG.  find_reloads will
4555	 force a reload in that case.  So we should not do anything here.  */
4556
4557      else if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4558#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
4559	       && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
4560		   <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4561#endif
4562	       && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0
4563		   || (reg_equiv_mem[regno] != 0
4564		       && (! strict_memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x),
4565						      XEXP (reg_equiv_mem[regno], 0))
4566			   || ! offsettable_memref_p (reg_equiv_mem[regno])
4567			   || num_not_at_initial_offset))))
4568	x = find_reloads_subreg_address (x, 1, opnum, type, ind_levels,
4569					 insn);
4570    }
4571
4572  for (copied = 0, i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4573    {
4574      if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4575	{
4576	  rtx new_part = find_reloads_toplev (XEXP (x, i), opnum, type,
4577					      ind_levels, is_set_dest, insn,
4578					      address_reloaded);
4579	  /* If we have replaced a reg with it's equivalent memory loc -
4580	     that can still be handled here e.g. if it's in a paradoxical
4581	     subreg - we must make the change in a copy, rather than using
4582	     a destructive change.  This way, find_reloads can still elect
4583	     not to do the change.  */
4584	  if (new_part != XEXP (x, i) && ! CONSTANT_P (new_part) && ! copied)
4585	    {
4586	      x = shallow_copy_rtx (x);
4587	      copied = 1;
4588	    }
4589	  XEXP (x, i) = new_part;
4590	}
4591    }
4592  return x;
4593}
4594
4595/* Return a mem ref for the memory equivalent of reg REGNO.
4596   This mem ref is not shared with anything.  */
4597
4598static rtx
4599make_memloc (rtx ad, int regno)
4600{
4601  /* We must rerun eliminate_regs, in case the elimination
4602     offsets have changed.  */
4603  rtx tem
4604    = XEXP (eliminate_regs (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno], 0, NULL_RTX), 0);
4605
4606  /* If TEM might contain a pseudo, we must copy it to avoid
4607     modifying it when we do the substitution for the reload.  */
4608  if (rtx_varies_p (tem, 0))
4609    tem = copy_rtx (tem);
4610
4611  tem = replace_equiv_address_nv (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno], tem);
4612  tem = adjust_address_nv (tem, GET_MODE (ad), 0);
4613
4614  /* Copy the result if it's still the same as the equivalence, to avoid
4615     modifying it when we do the substitution for the reload.  */
4616  if (tem == reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno])
4617    tem = copy_rtx (tem);
4618  return tem;
4619}
4620
4621/* Returns true if AD could be turned into a valid memory reference
4622   to mode MODE by reloading the part pointed to by PART into a
4623   register.  */
4624
4625static int
4626maybe_memory_address_p (enum machine_mode mode, rtx ad, rtx *part)
4627{
4628  int retv;
4629  rtx tem = *part;
4630  rtx reg = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (tem), max_reg_num ());
4631
4632  *part = reg;
4633  retv = memory_address_p (mode, ad);
4634  *part = tem;
4635
4636  return retv;
4637}
4638
4639/* Record all reloads needed for handling memory address AD
4640   which appears in *LOC in a memory reference to mode MODE
4641   which itself is found in location  *MEMREFLOC.
4642   Note that we take shortcuts assuming that no multi-reg machine mode
4643   occurs as part of an address.
4644
4645   OPNUM and TYPE specify the purpose of this reload.
4646
4647   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing this machine
4648   supports.
4649
4650   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
4651   to determine if we may generate output reloads, and where to put USEs
4652   for pseudos that we have to replace with stack slots.
4653
4654   Value is nonzero if this address is reloaded or replaced as a whole.
4655   This is interesting to the caller if the address is an autoincrement.
4656
4657   Note that there is no verification that the address will be valid after
4658   this routine does its work.  Instead, we rely on the fact that the address
4659   was valid when reload started.  So we need only undo things that reload
4660   could have broken.  These are wrong register types, pseudos not allocated
4661   to a hard register, and frame pointer elimination.  */
4662
4663static int
4664find_reloads_address (enum machine_mode mode, rtx *memrefloc, rtx ad,
4665		      rtx *loc, int opnum, enum reload_type type,
4666		      int ind_levels, rtx insn)
4667{
4668  int regno;
4669  int removed_and = 0;
4670  rtx tem;
4671
4672  /* If the address is a register, see if it is a legitimate address and
4673     reload if not.  We first handle the cases where we need not reload
4674     or where we must reload in a non-standard way.  */
4675
4676  if (GET_CODE (ad) == REG)
4677    {
4678      regno = REGNO (ad);
4679
4680      /* If the register is equivalent to an invariant expression, substitute
4681	 the invariant, and eliminate any eliminable register references.  */
4682      tem = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
4683      if (tem != 0
4684	  && (tem = eliminate_regs (tem, mode, insn))
4685	  && strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem))
4686	{
4687	  *loc = ad = tem;
4688	  return 0;
4689	}
4690
4691      tem = reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno];
4692      if (tem != 0)
4693	{
4694	  if (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset)
4695	    {
4696	      tem = make_memloc (ad, regno);
4697	      if (! strict_memory_address_p (GET_MODE (tem), XEXP (tem, 0)))
4698		{
4699		  find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
4700					&XEXP (tem, 0), opnum,
4701					ADDR_TYPE (type), ind_levels, insn);
4702		}
4703	      /* We can avoid a reload if the register's equivalent memory
4704		 expression is valid as an indirect memory address.
4705		 But not all addresses are valid in a mem used as an indirect
4706		 address: only reg or reg+constant.  */
4707
4708	      if (ind_levels > 0
4709		  && strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem)
4710		  && (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == REG
4711		      || (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == PLUS
4712			  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0)) == REG
4713			  && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 1)))))
4714		{
4715		  /* TEM is not the same as what we'll be replacing the
4716		     pseudo with after reload, put a USE in front of INSN
4717		     in the final reload pass.  */
4718		  if (replace_reloads
4719		      && num_not_at_initial_offset
4720		      && ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
4721		    {
4722		      *loc = tem;
4723		      /* We mark the USE with QImode so that we
4724			 recognize it as one that can be safely
4725			 deleted at the end of reload.  */
4726		      PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, ad),
4727						  insn), QImode);
4728
4729		      /* This doesn't really count as replacing the address
4730			 as a whole, since it is still a memory access.  */
4731		    }
4732		  return 0;
4733		}
4734	      ad = tem;
4735	    }
4736	}
4737
4738      /* The only remaining case where we can avoid a reload is if this is a
4739	 hard register that is valid as a base register and which is not the
4740	 subject of a CLOBBER in this insn.  */
4741
4742      else if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4743	       && REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode)
4744	       && ! regno_clobbered_p (regno, this_insn, mode, 0))
4745	return 0;
4746
4747      /* If we do not have one of the cases above, we must do the reload.  */
4748      push_reload (ad, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0, MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4749		   GET_MODE (ad), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
4750      return 1;
4751    }
4752
4753  if (strict_memory_address_p (mode, ad))
4754    {
4755      /* The address appears valid, so reloads are not needed.
4756	 But the address may contain an eliminable register.
4757	 This can happen because a machine with indirect addressing
4758	 may consider a pseudo register by itself a valid address even when
4759	 it has failed to get a hard reg.
4760	 So do a tree-walk to find and eliminate all such regs.  */
4761
4762      /* But first quickly dispose of a common case.  */
4763      if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS
4764	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT
4765	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == REG
4766	  && reg_equiv_constant[REGNO (XEXP (ad, 0))] == 0)
4767	return 0;
4768
4769      subst_reg_equivs_changed = 0;
4770      *loc = subst_reg_equivs (ad, insn);
4771
4772      if (! subst_reg_equivs_changed)
4773	return 0;
4774
4775      /* Check result for validity after substitution.  */
4776      if (strict_memory_address_p (mode, ad))
4777	return 0;
4778    }
4779
4780#ifdef LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4781  do
4782    {
4783      if (memrefloc)
4784	{
4785	  LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (ad, GET_MODE (*memrefloc), opnum, type,
4786				     ind_levels, win);
4787	}
4788      break;
4789    win:
4790      *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
4791      XEXP (*memrefloc, 0) = ad;
4792      move_replacements (&ad, &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0));
4793      return 1;
4794    }
4795  while (0);
4796#endif
4797
4798  /* The address is not valid.  We have to figure out why.  First see if
4799     we have an outer AND and remove it if so.  Then analyze what's inside.  */
4800
4801  if (GET_CODE (ad) == AND)
4802    {
4803      removed_and = 1;
4804      loc = &XEXP (ad, 0);
4805      ad = *loc;
4806    }
4807
4808  /* One possibility for why the address is invalid is that it is itself
4809     a MEM.  This can happen when the frame pointer is being eliminated, a
4810     pseudo is not allocated to a hard register, and the offset between the
4811     frame and stack pointers is not its initial value.  In that case the
4812     pseudo will have been replaced by a MEM referring to the
4813     stack pointer.  */
4814  if (GET_CODE (ad) == MEM)
4815    {
4816      /* First ensure that the address in this MEM is valid.  Then, unless
4817	 indirect addresses are valid, reload the MEM into a register.  */
4818      tem = ad;
4819      find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (ad), &tem, XEXP (ad, 0), &XEXP (ad, 0),
4820			    opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type),
4821			    ind_levels == 0 ? 0 : ind_levels - 1, insn);
4822
4823      /* If tem was changed, then we must create a new memory reference to
4824	 hold it and store it back into memrefloc.  */
4825      if (tem != ad && memrefloc)
4826	{
4827	  *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
4828	  copy_replacements (tem, XEXP (*memrefloc, 0));
4829	  loc = &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0);
4830	  if (removed_and)
4831	    loc = &XEXP (*loc, 0);
4832	}
4833
4834      /* Check similar cases as for indirect addresses as above except
4835	 that we can allow pseudos and a MEM since they should have been
4836	 taken care of above.  */
4837
4838      if (ind_levels == 0
4839	  || (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF && ! indirect_symref_ok)
4840	  || GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == MEM
4841	  || ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == REG
4842		|| (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == PLUS
4843		    && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0)) == REG
4844		    && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)))
4845	{
4846	  /* Must use TEM here, not AD, since it is the one that will
4847	     have any subexpressions reloaded, if needed.  */
4848	  push_reload (tem, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
4849		       MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode), GET_MODE (tem),
4850		       VOIDmode, 0,
4851		       0, opnum, type);
4852	  return ! removed_and;
4853	}
4854      else
4855	return 0;
4856    }
4857
4858  /* If we have address of a stack slot but it's not valid because the
4859     displacement is too large, compute the sum in a register.
4860     Handle all base registers here, not just fp/ap/sp, because on some
4861     targets (namely SH) we can also get too large displacements from
4862     big-endian corrections.  */
4863  else if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS
4864	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == REG
4865	   && REGNO (XEXP (ad, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4866	   && REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (XEXP (ad, 0), mode)
4867	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT)
4868    {
4869      /* Unshare the MEM rtx so we can safely alter it.  */
4870      if (memrefloc)
4871	{
4872	  *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
4873	  loc = &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0);
4874	  if (removed_and)
4875	    loc = &XEXP (*loc, 0);
4876	}
4877
4878      if (double_reg_address_ok)
4879	{
4880	  /* Unshare the sum as well.  */
4881	  *loc = ad = copy_rtx (ad);
4882
4883	  /* Reload the displacement into an index reg.
4884	     We assume the frame pointer or arg pointer is a base reg.  */
4885	  find_reloads_address_part (XEXP (ad, 1), &XEXP (ad, 1),
4886				     INDEX_REG_CLASS, GET_MODE (ad), opnum,
4887				     type, ind_levels);
4888	  return 0;
4889	}
4890      else
4891	{
4892	  /* If the sum of two regs is not necessarily valid,
4893	     reload the sum into a base reg.
4894	     That will at least work.  */
4895	  find_reloads_address_part (ad, loc, MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4896				     Pmode, opnum, type, ind_levels);
4897	}
4898      return ! removed_and;
4899    }
4900
4901  /* If we have an indexed stack slot, there are three possible reasons why
4902     it might be invalid: The index might need to be reloaded, the address
4903     might have been made by frame pointer elimination and hence have a
4904     constant out of range, or both reasons might apply.
4905
4906     We can easily check for an index needing reload, but even if that is the
4907     case, we might also have an invalid constant.  To avoid making the
4908     conservative assumption and requiring two reloads, we see if this address
4909     is valid when not interpreted strictly.  If it is, the only problem is
4910     that the index needs a reload and find_reloads_address_1 will take care
4911     of it.
4912
4913     Handle all base registers here, not just fp/ap/sp, because on some
4914     targets (namely SPARC) we can also get invalid addresses from preventive
4915     subreg big-endian corrections made by find_reloads_toplev.
4916
4917     If we decide to do something, it must be that `double_reg_address_ok'
4918     is true.  We generate a reload of the base register + constant and
4919     rework the sum so that the reload register will be added to the index.
4920     This is safe because we know the address isn't shared.
4921
4922     We check for the base register as both the first and second operand of
4923     the innermost PLUS.  */
4924
4925  else if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT
4926	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == PLUS
4927	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0)) == REG
4928	   && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4929	   && (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0), mode)
4930	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == frame_pointer_rtx
4931#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
4932	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
4933#endif
4934#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
4935	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == arg_pointer_rtx
4936#endif
4937	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0) == stack_pointer_rtx)
4938	   && ! maybe_memory_address_p (mode, ad, &XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1)))
4939    {
4940      *loc = ad = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (ad),
4941				plus_constant (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0),
4942					       INTVAL (XEXP (ad, 1))),
4943				XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1));
4944      find_reloads_address_part (XEXP (ad, 0), &XEXP (ad, 0),
4945				 MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4946				 GET_MODE (ad), opnum, type, ind_levels);
4947      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (ad, 1), 1, &XEXP (ad, 1), opnum,
4948			      type, 0, insn);
4949
4950      return 0;
4951    }
4952
4953  else if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT
4954	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 0)) == PLUS
4955	   && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1)) == REG
4956	   && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4957	   && (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1), mode)
4958	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == frame_pointer_rtx
4959#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
4960	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
4961#endif
4962#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
4963	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == arg_pointer_rtx
4964#endif
4965	       || XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1) == stack_pointer_rtx)
4966	   && ! maybe_memory_address_p (mode, ad, &XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0)))
4967    {
4968      *loc = ad = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (ad),
4969				XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 0),
4970				plus_constant (XEXP (XEXP (ad, 0), 1),
4971					       INTVAL (XEXP (ad, 1))));
4972      find_reloads_address_part (XEXP (ad, 1), &XEXP (ad, 1),
4973				 MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
4974				 GET_MODE (ad), opnum, type, ind_levels);
4975      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (ad, 0), 1, &XEXP (ad, 0), opnum,
4976			      type, 0, insn);
4977
4978      return 0;
4979    }
4980
4981  /* See if address becomes valid when an eliminable register
4982     in a sum is replaced.  */
4983
4984  tem = ad;
4985  if (GET_CODE (ad) == PLUS)
4986    tem = subst_indexed_address (ad);
4987  if (tem != ad && strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem))
4988    {
4989      /* Ok, we win that way.  Replace any additional eliminable
4990	 registers.  */
4991
4992      subst_reg_equivs_changed = 0;
4993      tem = subst_reg_equivs (tem, insn);
4994
4995      /* Make sure that didn't make the address invalid again.  */
4996
4997      if (! subst_reg_equivs_changed || strict_memory_address_p (mode, tem))
4998	{
4999	  *loc = tem;
5000	  return 0;
5001	}
5002    }
5003
5004  /* If constants aren't valid addresses, reload the constant address
5005     into a register.  */
5006  if (CONSTANT_P (ad) && ! strict_memory_address_p (mode, ad))
5007    {
5008      /* If AD is an address in the constant pool, the MEM rtx may be shared.
5009	 Unshare it so we can safely alter it.  */
5010      if (memrefloc && GET_CODE (ad) == SYMBOL_REF
5011	  && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (ad))
5012	{
5013	  *memrefloc = copy_rtx (*memrefloc);
5014	  loc = &XEXP (*memrefloc, 0);
5015	  if (removed_and)
5016	    loc = &XEXP (*loc, 0);
5017	}
5018
5019      find_reloads_address_part (ad, loc, MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
5020				 Pmode, opnum, type, ind_levels);
5021      return ! removed_and;
5022    }
5023
5024  return find_reloads_address_1 (mode, ad, 0, loc, opnum, type, ind_levels,
5025				 insn);
5026}
5027
5028/* Find all pseudo regs appearing in AD
5029   that are eliminable in favor of equivalent values
5030   and do not have hard regs; replace them by their equivalents.
5031   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  We put USEs in
5032   front of it for pseudos that we have to replace with stack slots.  */
5033
5034static rtx
5035subst_reg_equivs (rtx ad, rtx insn)
5036{
5037  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (ad);
5038  int i;
5039  const char *fmt;
5040
5041  switch (code)
5042    {
5043    case HIGH:
5044    case CONST_INT:
5045    case CONST:
5046    case CONST_DOUBLE:
5047    case CONST_VECTOR:
5048    case SYMBOL_REF:
5049    case LABEL_REF:
5050    case PC:
5051    case CC0:
5052      return ad;
5053
5054    case REG:
5055      {
5056	int regno = REGNO (ad);
5057
5058	if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5059	  {
5060	    subst_reg_equivs_changed = 1;
5061	    return reg_equiv_constant[regno];
5062	  }
5063	if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] && num_not_at_initial_offset)
5064	  {
5065	    rtx mem = make_memloc (ad, regno);
5066	    if (! rtx_equal_p (mem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5067	      {
5068		subst_reg_equivs_changed = 1;
5069		/* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize it
5070		   as one that can be safely deleted at the end of
5071		   reload.  */
5072		PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, ad), insn),
5073			  QImode);
5074		return mem;
5075	      }
5076	  }
5077      }
5078      return ad;
5079
5080    case PLUS:
5081      /* Quickly dispose of a common case.  */
5082      if (XEXP (ad, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx
5083	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (ad, 1)) == CONST_INT)
5084	return ad;
5085      break;
5086
5087    default:
5088      break;
5089    }
5090
5091  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5092  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
5093    if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5094      XEXP (ad, i) = subst_reg_equivs (XEXP (ad, i), insn);
5095  return ad;
5096}
5097
5098/* Compute the sum of X and Y, making canonicalizations assumed in an
5099   address, namely: sum constant integers, surround the sum of two
5100   constants with a CONST, put the constant as the second operand, and
5101   group the constant on the outermost sum.
5102
5103   This routine assumes both inputs are already in canonical form.  */
5104
5105rtx
5106form_sum (rtx x, rtx y)
5107{
5108  rtx tem;
5109  enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5110
5111  if (mode == VOIDmode)
5112    mode = GET_MODE (y);
5113
5114  if (mode == VOIDmode)
5115    mode = Pmode;
5116
5117  if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT)
5118    return plus_constant (y, INTVAL (x));
5119  else if (GET_CODE (y) == CONST_INT)
5120    return plus_constant (x, INTVAL (y));
5121  else if (CONSTANT_P (x))
5122    tem = x, x = y, y = tem;
5123
5124  if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
5125    return form_sum (XEXP (x, 0), form_sum (XEXP (x, 1), y));
5126
5127  /* Note that if the operands of Y are specified in the opposite
5128     order in the recursive calls below, infinite recursion will occur.  */
5129  if (GET_CODE (y) == PLUS && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (y, 1)))
5130    return form_sum (form_sum (x, XEXP (y, 0)), XEXP (y, 1));
5131
5132  /* If both constant, encapsulate sum.  Otherwise, just form sum.  A
5133     constant will have been placed second.  */
5134  if (CONSTANT_P (x) && CONSTANT_P (y))
5135    {
5136      if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
5137	x = XEXP (x, 0);
5138      if (GET_CODE (y) == CONST)
5139	y = XEXP (y, 0);
5140
5141      return gen_rtx_CONST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, x, y));
5142    }
5143
5144  return gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, x, y);
5145}
5146
5147/* If ADDR is a sum containing a pseudo register that should be
5148   replaced with a constant (from reg_equiv_constant),
5149   return the result of doing so, and also apply the associative
5150   law so that the result is more likely to be a valid address.
5151   (But it is not guaranteed to be one.)
5152
5153   Note that at most one register is replaced, even if more are
5154   replaceable.  Also, we try to put the result into a canonical form
5155   so it is more likely to be a valid address.
5156
5157   In all other cases, return ADDR.  */
5158
5159static rtx
5160subst_indexed_address (rtx addr)
5161{
5162  rtx op0 = 0, op1 = 0, op2 = 0;
5163  rtx tem;
5164  int regno;
5165
5166  if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
5167    {
5168      /* Try to find a register to replace.  */
5169      op0 = XEXP (addr, 0), op1 = XEXP (addr, 1), op2 = 0;
5170      if (GET_CODE (op0) == REG
5171	  && (regno = REGNO (op0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5172	  && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
5173	  && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5174	op0 = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
5175      else if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG
5176	       && (regno = REGNO (op1)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5177	       && reg_renumber[regno] < 0
5178	       && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5179	op1 = reg_equiv_constant[regno];
5180      else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
5181	       && (tem = subst_indexed_address (op0)) != op0)
5182	op0 = tem;
5183      else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
5184	       && (tem = subst_indexed_address (op1)) != op1)
5185	op1 = tem;
5186      else
5187	return addr;
5188
5189      /* Pick out up to three things to add.  */
5190      if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS)
5191	op2 = XEXP (op1, 1), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
5192      else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS)
5193	op2 = op1, op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
5194
5195      /* Compute the sum.  */
5196      if (op2 != 0)
5197	op1 = form_sum (op1, op2);
5198      if (op1 != 0)
5199	op0 = form_sum (op0, op1);
5200
5201      return op0;
5202    }
5203  return addr;
5204}
5205
5206/* Update the REG_INC notes for an insn.  It updates all REG_INC
5207   notes for the instruction which refer to REGNO the to refer
5208   to the reload number.
5209
5210   INSN is the insn for which any REG_INC notes need updating.
5211
5212   REGNO is the register number which has been reloaded.
5213
5214   RELOADNUM is the reload number.  */
5215
5216static void
5217update_auto_inc_notes (rtx insn ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int regno ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
5218		       int reloadnum ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
5219{
5220#ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
5221  rtx link;
5222
5223  for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
5224    if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
5225        && (int) REGNO (XEXP (link, 0)) == regno)
5226      push_replacement (&XEXP (link, 0), reloadnum, VOIDmode);
5227#endif
5228}
5229
5230/* Record the pseudo registers we must reload into hard registers in a
5231   subexpression of a would-be memory address, X referring to a value
5232   in mode MODE.  (This function is not called if the address we find
5233   is strictly valid.)
5234
5235   CONTEXT = 1 means we are considering regs as index regs,
5236   = 0 means we are considering them as base regs.
5237
5238   OPNUM and TYPE specify the purpose of any reloads made.
5239
5240   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing are
5241   supported at this point in the address.
5242
5243   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
5244   to determine if we may generate output reloads.
5245
5246   We return nonzero if X, as a whole, is reloaded or replaced.  */
5247
5248/* Note that we take shortcuts assuming that no multi-reg machine mode
5249   occurs as part of an address.
5250   Also, this is not fully machine-customizable; it works for machines
5251   such as VAXen and 68000's and 32000's, but other possible machines
5252   could have addressing modes that this does not handle right.  */
5253
5254static int
5255find_reloads_address_1 (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, int context,
5256			rtx *loc, int opnum, enum reload_type type,
5257			int ind_levels, rtx insn)
5258{
5259  RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
5260
5261  switch (code)
5262    {
5263    case PLUS:
5264      {
5265	rtx orig_op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
5266	rtx orig_op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5267	RTX_CODE code0 = GET_CODE (orig_op0);
5268	RTX_CODE code1 = GET_CODE (orig_op1);
5269	rtx op0 = orig_op0;
5270	rtx op1 = orig_op1;
5271
5272	if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
5273	  {
5274	    op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
5275	    code0 = GET_CODE (op0);
5276	    if (code0 == REG && REGNO (op0) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5277	      op0 = gen_rtx_REG (word_mode,
5278				 (REGNO (op0) +
5279				  subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (orig_op0)),
5280						       GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (orig_op0)),
5281						       SUBREG_BYTE (orig_op0),
5282						       GET_MODE (orig_op0))));
5283	  }
5284
5285	if (GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG)
5286	  {
5287	    op1 = SUBREG_REG (op1);
5288	    code1 = GET_CODE (op1);
5289	    if (code1 == REG && REGNO (op1) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5290	      /* ??? Why is this given op1's mode and above for
5291		 ??? op0 SUBREGs we use word_mode?  */
5292	      op1 = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (op1),
5293				 (REGNO (op1) +
5294				  subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (orig_op1)),
5295						       GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (orig_op1)),
5296						       SUBREG_BYTE (orig_op1),
5297						       GET_MODE (orig_op1))));
5298	  }
5299	/* Plus in the index register may be created only as a result of
5300	   register remateralization for expression like &localvar*4.  Reload it.
5301	   It may be possible to combine the displacement on the outer level,
5302	   but it is probably not worthwhile to do so.  */
5303	if (context)
5304	  {
5305	    find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), loc, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
5306				  opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type), ind_levels, insn);
5307	    push_reload (*loc, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5308			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5309			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5310	    return 1;
5311	  }
5312
5313	if (code0 == MULT || code0 == SIGN_EXTEND || code0 == TRUNCATE
5314	    || code0 == ZERO_EXTEND || code1 == MEM)
5315	  {
5316	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5317				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5318	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5319				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5320	  }
5321
5322	else if (code1 == MULT || code1 == SIGN_EXTEND || code1 == TRUNCATE
5323		 || code1 == ZERO_EXTEND || code0 == MEM)
5324	  {
5325	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5326				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5327	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 1, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5328				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5329	  }
5330
5331	else if (code0 == CONST_INT || code0 == CONST
5332		 || code0 == SYMBOL_REF || code0 == LABEL_REF)
5333	  find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5334				  type, ind_levels, insn);
5335
5336	else if (code1 == CONST_INT || code1 == CONST
5337		 || code1 == SYMBOL_REF || code1 == LABEL_REF)
5338	  find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5339				  type, ind_levels, insn);
5340
5341	else if (code0 == REG && code1 == REG)
5342	  {
5343	    if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op0)
5344		&& REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op1, mode))
5345	      return 0;
5346	    else if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op1)
5347		     && REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op0, mode))
5348	      return 0;
5349	    else if (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op1, mode))
5350	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5351				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5352	    else if (REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (op0, mode))
5353	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 1, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5354				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5355	    else if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op1))
5356	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5357				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5358	    else if (REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (op0))
5359	      find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5360				      type, ind_levels, insn);
5361	    else
5362	      {
5363		find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5364					type, ind_levels, insn);
5365		find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5366					type, ind_levels, insn);
5367	      }
5368	  }
5369
5370	else if (code0 == REG)
5371	  {
5372	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 1, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5373				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5374	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 0, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5375				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5376	  }
5377
5378	else if (code1 == REG)
5379	  {
5380	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op1, 1, &XEXP (x, 1), opnum,
5381				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5382	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, orig_op0, 0, &XEXP (x, 0), opnum,
5383				    type, ind_levels, insn);
5384	  }
5385      }
5386
5387      return 0;
5388
5389    case POST_MODIFY:
5390    case PRE_MODIFY:
5391      {
5392	rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
5393	rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5394
5395	if (GET_CODE (op1) != PLUS && GET_CODE (op1) != MINUS)
5396	  return 0;
5397
5398	/* Currently, we only support {PRE,POST}_MODIFY constructs
5399	   where a base register is {inc,dec}remented by the contents
5400	   of another register or by a constant value.  Thus, these
5401	   operands must match.  */
5402	if (op0 != XEXP (op1, 0))
5403	  abort ();
5404
5405	/* Require index register (or constant).  Let's just handle the
5406	   register case in the meantime... If the target allows
5407	   auto-modify by a constant then we could try replacing a pseudo
5408	   register with its equivalent constant where applicable.  */
5409	if (REG_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
5410	  if (!REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (REGNO (XEXP (op1, 1))))
5411	    find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (op1, 1), 1, &XEXP (op1, 1),
5412				    opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
5413
5414	if (REG_P (XEXP (op1, 0)))
5415	  {
5416	    int regno = REGNO (XEXP (op1, 0));
5417	    int reloadnum;
5418
5419	    /* A register that is incremented cannot be constant!  */
5420	    if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5421		&& reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5422	      abort ();
5423
5424	    /* Handle a register that is equivalent to a memory location
5425	       which cannot be addressed directly.  */
5426	    if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0
5427		&& (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0
5428		    || num_not_at_initial_offset))
5429	      {
5430		rtx tem = make_memloc (XEXP (x, 0), regno);
5431
5432		if (reg_equiv_address[regno]
5433		    || ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5434		  {
5435		    /* First reload the memory location's address.
5436		       We can't use ADDR_TYPE (type) here, because we need to
5437		       write back the value after reading it, hence we actually
5438		       need two registers.  */
5439		    find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
5440					  &XEXP (tem, 0), opnum,
5441					  RELOAD_OTHER,
5442					  ind_levels, insn);
5443
5444		    /* Then reload the memory location into a base
5445		       register.  */
5446		    reloadnum = push_reload (tem, tem, &XEXP (x, 0),
5447					     &XEXP (op1, 0),
5448					     MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
5449					     GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0,
5450					     0, opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
5451
5452		    update_auto_inc_notes (this_insn, regno, reloadnum);
5453		    return 0;
5454		  }
5455	      }
5456
5457	    if (reg_renumber[regno] >= 0)
5458	      regno = reg_renumber[regno];
5459
5460	    /* We require a base register here...  */
5461	    if (!REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, GET_MODE (x)))
5462	      {
5463		reloadnum = push_reload (XEXP (op1, 0), XEXP (x, 0),
5464					 &XEXP (op1, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
5465					 MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode),
5466					 GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0, 0,
5467					 opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
5468
5469		update_auto_inc_notes (this_insn, regno, reloadnum);
5470		return 0;
5471	      }
5472	  }
5473	else
5474	  abort ();
5475      }
5476      return 0;
5477
5478    case POST_INC:
5479    case POST_DEC:
5480    case PRE_INC:
5481    case PRE_DEC:
5482      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG)
5483	{
5484	  int regno = REGNO (XEXP (x, 0));
5485	  int value = 0;
5486	  rtx x_orig = x;
5487
5488	  /* A register that is incremented cannot be constant!  */
5489	  if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5490	      && reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5491	    abort ();
5492
5493	  /* Handle a register that is equivalent to a memory location
5494	     which cannot be addressed directly.  */
5495	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0
5496	      && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
5497	    {
5498	      rtx tem = make_memloc (XEXP (x, 0), regno);
5499	      if (reg_equiv_address[regno]
5500		  || ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5501		{
5502		  /* First reload the memory location's address.
5503		     We can't use ADDR_TYPE (type) here, because we need to
5504		     write back the value after reading it, hence we actually
5505		     need two registers.  */
5506		  find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
5507					&XEXP (tem, 0), opnum, type,
5508					ind_levels, insn);
5509		  /* Put this inside a new increment-expression.  */
5510		  x = gen_rtx_fmt_e (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), tem);
5511		  /* Proceed to reload that, as if it contained a register.  */
5512		}
5513	    }
5514
5515	  /* If we have a hard register that is ok as an index,
5516	     don't make a reload.  If an autoincrement of a nice register
5517	     isn't "valid", it must be that no autoincrement is "valid".
5518	     If that is true and something made an autoincrement anyway,
5519	     this must be a special context where one is allowed.
5520	     (For example, a "push" instruction.)
5521	     We can't improve this address, so leave it alone.  */
5522
5523	  /* Otherwise, reload the autoincrement into a suitable hard reg
5524	     and record how much to increment by.  */
5525
5526	  if (reg_renumber[regno] >= 0)
5527	    regno = reg_renumber[regno];
5528	  if ((regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5529	       || !(context ? REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (regno)
5530		    : REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode))))
5531	    {
5532	      int reloadnum;
5533
5534	      /* If we can output the register afterwards, do so, this
5535		 saves the extra update.
5536		 We can do so if we have an INSN - i.e. no JUMP_INSN nor
5537		 CALL_INSN - and it does not set CC0.
5538		 But don't do this if we cannot directly address the
5539		 memory location, since this will make it harder to
5540		 reuse address reloads, and increases register pressure.
5541		 Also don't do this if we can probably update x directly.  */
5542	      rtx equiv = (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM
5543			   ? XEXP (x, 0)
5544			   : reg_equiv_mem[regno]);
5545	      int icode = (int) add_optab->handlers[(int) Pmode].insn_code;
5546	      if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == INSN && equiv
5547		  && memory_operand (equiv, GET_MODE (equiv))
5548#ifdef HAVE_cc0
5549		  && ! sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (insn))
5550#endif
5551		  && ! (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
5552			&& ((*insn_data[icode].operand[0].predicate)
5553			    (equiv, Pmode))
5554			&& ((*insn_data[icode].operand[1].predicate)
5555			    (equiv, Pmode))))
5556		{
5557		  /* We use the original pseudo for loc, so that
5558		     emit_reload_insns() knows which pseudo this
5559		     reload refers to and updates the pseudo rtx, not
5560		     its equivalent memory location, as well as the
5561		     corresponding entry in reg_last_reload_reg.  */
5562		  loc = &XEXP (x_orig, 0);
5563		  x = XEXP (x, 0);
5564		  reloadnum
5565		    = push_reload (x, x, loc, loc,
5566				   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5567				    MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5568				   GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0, 0,
5569				   opnum, RELOAD_OTHER);
5570		}
5571	      else
5572		{
5573		  reloadnum
5574		    = push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5575				   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5576				    MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5577				   GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (x), 0, 0,
5578				   opnum, type);
5579		  rld[reloadnum].inc
5580		    = find_inc_amount (PATTERN (this_insn), XEXP (x_orig, 0));
5581
5582		  value = 1;
5583		}
5584
5585	      update_auto_inc_notes (this_insn, REGNO (XEXP (x_orig, 0)),
5586				     reloadnum);
5587	    }
5588	  return value;
5589	}
5590
5591      else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
5592	{
5593	  /* This is probably the result of a substitution, by eliminate_regs,
5594	     of an equivalent address for a pseudo that was not allocated to a
5595	     hard register.  Verify that the specified address is valid and
5596	     reload it into a register.  */
5597	  /* Variable `tem' might or might not be used in FIND_REG_INC_NOTE.  */
5598	  rtx tem ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED = XEXP (x, 0);
5599	  rtx link;
5600	  int reloadnum;
5601
5602	  /* Since we know we are going to reload this item, don't decrement
5603	     for the indirection level.
5604
5605	     Note that this is actually conservative:  it would be slightly
5606	     more efficient to use the value of SPILL_INDIRECT_LEVELS from
5607	     reload1.c here.  */
5608	  /* We can't use ADDR_TYPE (type) here, because we need to
5609	     write back the value after reading it, hence we actually
5610	     need two registers.  */
5611	  find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &XEXP (x, 0),
5612				XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5613				opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
5614
5615	  reloadnum = push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5616				   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5617				    MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5618				   GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5619	  rld[reloadnum].inc
5620	    = find_inc_amount (PATTERN (this_insn), XEXP (x, 0));
5621
5622	  link = FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (this_insn, tem);
5623	  if (link != 0)
5624	    push_replacement (&XEXP (link, 0), reloadnum, VOIDmode);
5625
5626	  return 1;
5627	}
5628      return 0;
5629
5630    case MEM:
5631      /* This is probably the result of a substitution, by eliminate_regs, of
5632	 an equivalent address for a pseudo that was not allocated to a hard
5633	 register.  Verify that the specified address is valid and reload it
5634	 into a register.
5635
5636	 Since we know we are going to reload this item, don't decrement for
5637	 the indirection level.
5638
5639	 Note that this is actually conservative:  it would be slightly more
5640	 efficient to use the value of SPILL_INDIRECT_LEVELS from
5641	 reload1.c here.  */
5642
5643      find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), loc, XEXP (x, 0), &XEXP (x, 0),
5644			    opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type), ind_levels, insn);
5645      push_reload (*loc, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5646		   (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5647		   GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5648      return 1;
5649
5650    case REG:
5651      {
5652	int regno = REGNO (x);
5653
5654	if (reg_equiv_constant[regno] != 0)
5655	  {
5656	    find_reloads_address_part (reg_equiv_constant[regno], loc,
5657				       (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5658					MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5659				       GET_MODE (x), opnum, type, ind_levels);
5660	    return 1;
5661	  }
5662
5663#if 0 /* This might screw code in reload1.c to delete prior output-reload
5664	 that feeds this insn.  */
5665	if (reg_equiv_mem[regno] != 0)
5666	  {
5667	    push_reload (reg_equiv_mem[regno], NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5668			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5669			  MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5670			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5671	    return 1;
5672	  }
5673#endif
5674
5675	if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno]
5676	    && (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0 || num_not_at_initial_offset))
5677	  {
5678	    rtx tem = make_memloc (x, regno);
5679	    if (reg_equiv_address[regno] != 0
5680		|| ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5681	      {
5682		x = tem;
5683		find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (x), &x, XEXP (x, 0),
5684				      &XEXP (x, 0), opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type),
5685				      ind_levels, insn);
5686	      }
5687	  }
5688
5689	if (reg_renumber[regno] >= 0)
5690	  regno = reg_renumber[regno];
5691
5692	if ((regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5693	     || !(context ? REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (regno)
5694		  : REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode))))
5695	  {
5696	    push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5697			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5698			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5699	    return 1;
5700	  }
5701
5702	/* If a register appearing in an address is the subject of a CLOBBER
5703	   in this insn, reload it into some other register to be safe.
5704	   The CLOBBER is supposed to make the register unavailable
5705	   from before this insn to after it.  */
5706	if (regno_clobbered_p (regno, this_insn, GET_MODE (x), 0))
5707	  {
5708	    push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5709			 (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5710			 GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5711	    return 1;
5712	  }
5713      }
5714      return 0;
5715
5716    case SUBREG:
5717      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG)
5718	{
5719	  /* If this is a SUBREG of a hard register and the resulting register
5720	     is of the wrong class, reload the whole SUBREG.  This avoids
5721	     needless copies if SUBREG_REG is multi-word.  */
5722	  if (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5723	    {
5724	      int regno ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED = subreg_regno (x);
5725
5726	      if (! (context ? REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (regno)
5727		     : REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (regno, mode)))
5728		{
5729		  push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0,
5730			       (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS :
5731				MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode)),
5732			       GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5733		  return 1;
5734		}
5735	    }
5736	  /* If this is a SUBREG of a pseudo-register, and the pseudo-register
5737	     is larger than the class size, then reload the whole SUBREG.  */
5738	  else
5739	    {
5740	      enum reg_class class = (context ? INDEX_REG_CLASS
5741				      : MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (mode));
5742	      if ((unsigned) CLASS_MAX_NREGS (class, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))
5743		  > reg_class_size[class])
5744		{
5745		  x = find_reloads_subreg_address (x, 0, opnum, type,
5746						   ind_levels, insn);
5747		  push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0, class,
5748			       GET_MODE (x), VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5749		  return 1;
5750		}
5751	    }
5752	}
5753      break;
5754
5755    default:
5756      break;
5757    }
5758
5759  {
5760    const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5761    int i;
5762
5763    for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
5764      {
5765	if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5766	  find_reloads_address_1 (mode, XEXP (x, i), context, &XEXP (x, i),
5767				  opnum, type, ind_levels, insn);
5768      }
5769  }
5770
5771  return 0;
5772}
5773
5774/* X, which is found at *LOC, is a part of an address that needs to be
5775   reloaded into a register of class CLASS.  If X is a constant, or if
5776   X is a PLUS that contains a constant, check that the constant is a
5777   legitimate operand and that we are supposed to be able to load
5778   it into the register.
5779
5780   If not, force the constant into memory and reload the MEM instead.
5781
5782   MODE is the mode to use, in case X is an integer constant.
5783
5784   OPNUM and TYPE describe the purpose of any reloads made.
5785
5786   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing this machine
5787   supports.  */
5788
5789static void
5790find_reloads_address_part (rtx x, rtx *loc, enum reg_class class,
5791			   enum machine_mode mode, int opnum,
5792			   enum reload_type type, int ind_levels)
5793{
5794  if (CONSTANT_P (x)
5795      && (! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x)
5796	  || PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (x, class) == NO_REGS))
5797    {
5798      rtx tem;
5799
5800      tem = x = force_const_mem (mode, x);
5801      find_reloads_address (mode, &tem, XEXP (tem, 0), &XEXP (tem, 0),
5802			    opnum, type, ind_levels, 0);
5803    }
5804
5805  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
5806	   && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5807	   && (! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5808	       || PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (XEXP (x, 1), class) == NO_REGS))
5809    {
5810      rtx tem;
5811
5812      tem = force_const_mem (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 1));
5813      x = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0), tem);
5814      find_reloads_address (mode, &tem, XEXP (tem, 0), &XEXP (tem, 0),
5815			    opnum, type, ind_levels, 0);
5816    }
5817
5818  push_reload (x, NULL_RTX, loc, (rtx*) 0, class,
5819	       mode, VOIDmode, 0, 0, opnum, type);
5820}
5821
5822/* X, a subreg of a pseudo, is a part of an address that needs to be
5823   reloaded.
5824
5825   If the pseudo is equivalent to a memory location that cannot be directly
5826   addressed, make the necessary address reloads.
5827
5828   If address reloads have been necessary, or if the address is changed
5829   by register elimination, return the rtx of the memory location;
5830   otherwise, return X.
5831
5832   If FORCE_REPLACE is nonzero, unconditionally replace the subreg with the
5833   memory location.
5834
5835   OPNUM and TYPE identify the purpose of the reload.
5836
5837   IND_LEVELS says how many levels of indirect addressing are
5838   supported at this point in the address.
5839
5840   INSN, if nonzero, is the insn in which we do the reload.  It is used
5841   to determine where to put USEs for pseudos that we have to replace with
5842   stack slots.  */
5843
5844static rtx
5845find_reloads_subreg_address (rtx x, int force_replace, int opnum,
5846			     enum reload_type type, int ind_levels, rtx insn)
5847{
5848  int regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
5849
5850  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno])
5851    {
5852      /* If the address is not directly addressable, or if the address is not
5853	 offsettable, then it must be replaced.  */
5854      if (! force_replace
5855	  && (reg_equiv_address[regno]
5856	      || ! offsettable_memref_p (reg_equiv_mem[regno])))
5857	force_replace = 1;
5858
5859      if (force_replace || num_not_at_initial_offset)
5860	{
5861	  rtx tem = make_memloc (SUBREG_REG (x), regno);
5862
5863	  /* If the address changes because of register elimination, then
5864	     it must be replaced.  */
5865	  if (force_replace
5866	      || ! rtx_equal_p (tem, reg_equiv_mem[regno]))
5867	    {
5868	      unsigned outer_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
5869	      unsigned inner_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
5870	      int offset;
5871
5872	      /* For big-endian paradoxical subregs, SUBREG_BYTE does not
5873		 hold the correct (negative) byte offset.  */
5874	      if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && outer_size > inner_size)
5875		offset = inner_size - outer_size;
5876	      else
5877		offset = SUBREG_BYTE (x);
5878
5879	      XEXP (tem, 0) = plus_constant (XEXP (tem, 0), offset);
5880	      PUT_MODE (tem, GET_MODE (x));
5881
5882	      /* If this was a paradoxical subreg that we replaced, the
5883		 resulting memory must be sufficiently aligned to allow
5884		 us to widen the mode of the memory.  */
5885	      if (outer_size > inner_size && STRICT_ALIGNMENT)
5886		{
5887		  rtx base;
5888
5889		  base = XEXP (tem, 0);
5890		  if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS)
5891		    {
5892		      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
5893			  && INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1)) % outer_size != 0)
5894			return x;
5895		      base = XEXP (base, 0);
5896		    }
5897		  if (GET_CODE (base) != REG
5898		      || (REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (REGNO (base))
5899			  < outer_size * BITS_PER_UNIT))
5900		    return x;
5901		}
5902
5903	      find_reloads_address (GET_MODE (tem), &tem, XEXP (tem, 0),
5904				    &XEXP (tem, 0), opnum, ADDR_TYPE (type),
5905				    ind_levels, insn);
5906
5907	      /* If this is not a toplevel operand, find_reloads doesn't see
5908		 this substitution.  We have to emit a USE of the pseudo so
5909		 that delete_output_reload can see it.  */
5910	      if (replace_reloads && recog_data.operand[opnum] != x)
5911		/* We mark the USE with QImode so that we recognize it
5912		   as one that can be safely deleted at the end of
5913		   reload.  */
5914		PUT_MODE (emit_insn_before (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode,
5915							 SUBREG_REG (x)),
5916					    insn), QImode);
5917	      x = tem;
5918	    }
5919	}
5920    }
5921  return x;
5922}
5923
5924/* Substitute into the current INSN the registers into which we have reloaded
5925   the things that need reloading.  The array `replacements'
5926   contains the locations of all pointers that must be changed
5927   and says what to replace them with.
5928
5929   Return the rtx that X translates into; usually X, but modified.  */
5930
5931void
5932subst_reloads (rtx insn)
5933{
5934  int i;
5935
5936  for (i = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
5937    {
5938      struct replacement *r = &replacements[i];
5939      rtx reloadreg = rld[r->what].reg_rtx;
5940      if (reloadreg)
5941	{
5942#ifdef ENABLE_CHECKING
5943	  /* Internal consistency test.  Check that we don't modify
5944	     anything in the equivalence arrays.  Whenever something from
5945	     those arrays needs to be reloaded, it must be unshared before
5946	     being substituted into; the equivalence must not be modified.
5947	     Otherwise, if the equivalence is used after that, it will
5948	     have been modified, and the thing substituted (probably a
5949	     register) is likely overwritten and not a usable equivalence.  */
5950	  int check_regno;
5951
5952	  for (check_regno = 0; check_regno < max_regno; check_regno++)
5953	    {
5954#define CHECK_MODF(ARRAY)						\
5955	      if (ARRAY[check_regno]					\
5956		  && loc_mentioned_in_p (r->where,			\
5957					 ARRAY[check_regno]))		\
5958		abort ()
5959
5960	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_constant);
5961	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_memory_loc);
5962	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_address);
5963	      CHECK_MODF (reg_equiv_mem);
5964#undef CHECK_MODF
5965	    }
5966#endif /* ENABLE_CHECKING */
5967
5968	  /* If we're replacing a LABEL_REF with a register, add a
5969	     REG_LABEL note to indicate to flow which label this
5970	     register refers to.  */
5971	  if (GET_CODE (*r->where) == LABEL_REF
5972	      && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
5973	    REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_INSN_LIST (REG_LABEL,
5974						  XEXP (*r->where, 0),
5975						  REG_NOTES (insn));
5976
5977	  /* Encapsulate RELOADREG so its machine mode matches what
5978	     used to be there.  Note that gen_lowpart_common will
5979	     do the wrong thing if RELOADREG is multi-word.  RELOADREG
5980	     will always be a REG here.  */
5981	  if (GET_MODE (reloadreg) != r->mode && r->mode != VOIDmode)
5982	    reloadreg = reload_adjust_reg_for_mode (reloadreg, r->mode);
5983
5984	  /* If we are putting this into a SUBREG and RELOADREG is a
5985	     SUBREG, we would be making nested SUBREGs, so we have to fix
5986	     this up.  Note that r->where == &SUBREG_REG (*r->subreg_loc).  */
5987
5988	  if (r->subreg_loc != 0 && GET_CODE (reloadreg) == SUBREG)
5989	    {
5990	      if (GET_MODE (*r->subreg_loc)
5991		  == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (reloadreg)))
5992		*r->subreg_loc = SUBREG_REG (reloadreg);
5993	      else
5994		{
5995		  int final_offset =
5996		    SUBREG_BYTE (*r->subreg_loc) + SUBREG_BYTE (reloadreg);
5997
5998		  /* When working with SUBREGs the rule is that the byte
5999		     offset must be a multiple of the SUBREG's mode.  */
6000		  final_offset = (final_offset /
6001				  GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*r->subreg_loc)));
6002		  final_offset = (final_offset *
6003				  GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*r->subreg_loc)));
6004
6005		  *r->where = SUBREG_REG (reloadreg);
6006		  SUBREG_BYTE (*r->subreg_loc) = final_offset;
6007		}
6008	    }
6009	  else
6010	    *r->where = reloadreg;
6011	}
6012      /* If reload got no reg and isn't optional, something's wrong.  */
6013      else if (! rld[r->what].optional)
6014	abort ();
6015    }
6016}
6017
6018/* Make a copy of any replacements being done into X and move those
6019   copies to locations in Y, a copy of X.  */
6020
6021void
6022copy_replacements (rtx x, rtx y)
6023{
6024  /* We can't support X being a SUBREG because we might then need to know its
6025     location if something inside it was replaced.  */
6026  if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
6027    abort ();
6028
6029  copy_replacements_1 (&x, &y, n_replacements);
6030}
6031
6032static void
6033copy_replacements_1 (rtx *px, rtx *py, int orig_replacements)
6034{
6035  int i, j;
6036  rtx x, y;
6037  struct replacement *r;
6038  enum rtx_code code;
6039  const char *fmt;
6040
6041  for (j = 0; j < orig_replacements; j++)
6042    {
6043      if (replacements[j].subreg_loc == px)
6044	{
6045	  r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
6046	  r->where = replacements[j].where;
6047	  r->subreg_loc = py;
6048	  r->what = replacements[j].what;
6049	  r->mode = replacements[j].mode;
6050	}
6051      else if (replacements[j].where == px)
6052	{
6053	  r = &replacements[n_replacements++];
6054	  r->where = py;
6055	  r->subreg_loc = 0;
6056	  r->what = replacements[j].what;
6057	  r->mode = replacements[j].mode;
6058	}
6059    }
6060
6061  x = *px;
6062  y = *py;
6063  code = GET_CODE (x);
6064  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6065
6066  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6067    {
6068      if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6069	copy_replacements_1 (&XEXP (x, i), &XEXP (y, i), orig_replacements);
6070      else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6071	for (j = XVECLEN (x, i); --j >= 0; )
6072	  copy_replacements_1 (&XVECEXP (x, i, j), &XVECEXP (y, i, j),
6073			       orig_replacements);
6074    }
6075}
6076
6077/* Change any replacements being done to *X to be done to *Y.  */
6078
6079void
6080move_replacements (rtx *x, rtx *y)
6081{
6082  int i;
6083
6084  for (i = 0; i < n_replacements; i++)
6085    if (replacements[i].subreg_loc == x)
6086      replacements[i].subreg_loc = y;
6087    else if (replacements[i].where == x)
6088      {
6089	replacements[i].where = y;
6090	replacements[i].subreg_loc = 0;
6091      }
6092}
6093
6094/* If LOC was scheduled to be replaced by something, return the replacement.
6095   Otherwise, return *LOC.  */
6096
6097rtx
6098find_replacement (rtx *loc)
6099{
6100  struct replacement *r;
6101
6102  for (r = &replacements[0]; r < &replacements[n_replacements]; r++)
6103    {
6104      rtx reloadreg = rld[r->what].reg_rtx;
6105
6106      if (reloadreg && r->where == loc)
6107	{
6108	  if (r->mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (reloadreg) != r->mode)
6109	    reloadreg = gen_rtx_REG (r->mode, REGNO (reloadreg));
6110
6111	  return reloadreg;
6112	}
6113      else if (reloadreg && r->subreg_loc == loc)
6114	{
6115	  /* RELOADREG must be either a REG or a SUBREG.
6116
6117	     ??? Is it actually still ever a SUBREG?  If so, why?  */
6118
6119	  if (GET_CODE (reloadreg) == REG)
6120	    return gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (*loc),
6121				(REGNO (reloadreg) +
6122				 subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (*loc)),
6123						      GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (*loc)),
6124						      SUBREG_BYTE (*loc),
6125						      GET_MODE (*loc))));
6126	  else if (GET_MODE (reloadreg) == GET_MODE (*loc))
6127	    return reloadreg;
6128	  else
6129	    {
6130	      int final_offset = SUBREG_BYTE (reloadreg) + SUBREG_BYTE (*loc);
6131
6132	      /* When working with SUBREGs the rule is that the byte
6133		 offset must be a multiple of the SUBREG's mode.  */
6134	      final_offset = (final_offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*loc)));
6135	      final_offset = (final_offset * GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (*loc)));
6136	      return gen_rtx_SUBREG (GET_MODE (*loc), SUBREG_REG (reloadreg),
6137				     final_offset);
6138	    }
6139	}
6140    }
6141
6142  /* If *LOC is a PLUS, MINUS, or MULT, see if a replacement is scheduled for
6143     what's inside and make a new rtl if so.  */
6144  if (GET_CODE (*loc) == PLUS || GET_CODE (*loc) == MINUS
6145      || GET_CODE (*loc) == MULT)
6146    {
6147      rtx x = find_replacement (&XEXP (*loc, 0));
6148      rtx y = find_replacement (&XEXP (*loc, 1));
6149
6150      if (x != XEXP (*loc, 0) || y != XEXP (*loc, 1))
6151	return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (*loc), GET_MODE (*loc), x, y);
6152    }
6153
6154  return *loc;
6155}
6156
6157/* Return nonzero if register in range [REGNO, ENDREGNO)
6158   appears either explicitly or implicitly in X
6159   other than being stored into (except for earlyclobber operands).
6160
6161   References contained within the substructure at LOC do not count.
6162   LOC may be zero, meaning don't ignore anything.
6163
6164   This is similar to refers_to_regno_p in rtlanal.c except that we
6165   look at equivalences for pseudos that didn't get hard registers.  */
6166
6167int
6168refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (unsigned int regno, unsigned int endregno,
6169			      rtx x, rtx *loc)
6170{
6171  int i;
6172  unsigned int r;
6173  RTX_CODE code;
6174  const char *fmt;
6175
6176  if (x == 0)
6177    return 0;
6178
6179 repeat:
6180  code = GET_CODE (x);
6181
6182  switch (code)
6183    {
6184    case REG:
6185      r = REGNO (x);
6186
6187      /* If this is a pseudo, a hard register must not have been allocated.
6188	 X must therefore either be a constant or be in memory.  */
6189      if (r >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6190	{
6191	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[r])
6192	    return refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6193						 reg_equiv_memory_loc[r],
6194						 (rtx*) 0);
6195
6196	  if (reg_equiv_constant[r])
6197	    return 0;
6198
6199	  abort ();
6200	}
6201
6202      return (endregno > r
6203	      && regno < r + (r < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6204			      ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (r, GET_MODE (x))
6205			      : 1));
6206
6207    case SUBREG:
6208      /* If this is a SUBREG of a hard reg, we can see exactly which
6209	 registers are being modified.  Otherwise, handle normally.  */
6210      if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
6211	  && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6212	{
6213	  unsigned int inner_regno = subreg_regno (x);
6214	  unsigned int inner_endregno
6215	    = inner_regno + (inner_regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6216			     ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)) : 1);
6217
6218	  return endregno > inner_regno && regno < inner_endregno;
6219	}
6220      break;
6221
6222    case CLOBBER:
6223    case SET:
6224      if (&SET_DEST (x) != loc
6225	  /* Note setting a SUBREG counts as referring to the REG it is in for
6226	     a pseudo but not for hard registers since we can
6227	     treat each word individually.  */
6228	  && ((GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
6229	       && loc != &SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))
6230	       && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))) == REG
6231	       && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6232	       && refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6233						SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)),
6234						loc))
6235	      /* If the output is an earlyclobber operand, this is
6236		 a conflict.  */
6237	      || ((GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG
6238		   || earlyclobber_operand_p (SET_DEST (x)))
6239		  && refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6240						   SET_DEST (x), loc))))
6241	return 1;
6242
6243      if (code == CLOBBER || loc == &SET_SRC (x))
6244	return 0;
6245      x = SET_SRC (x);
6246      goto repeat;
6247
6248    default:
6249      break;
6250    }
6251
6252  /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions.  */
6253
6254  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6255  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6256    {
6257      if (fmt[i] == 'e' && loc != &XEXP (x, i))
6258	{
6259	  if (i == 0)
6260	    {
6261	      x = XEXP (x, 0);
6262	      goto repeat;
6263	    }
6264	  else
6265	    if (refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6266					      XEXP (x, i), loc))
6267	      return 1;
6268	}
6269      else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6270	{
6271	  int j;
6272	  for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6273	    if (loc != &XVECEXP (x, i, j)
6274		&& refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno,
6275						 XVECEXP (x, i, j), loc))
6276	      return 1;
6277	}
6278    }
6279  return 0;
6280}
6281
6282/* Nonzero if modifying X will affect IN.  If X is a register or a SUBREG,
6283   we check if any register number in X conflicts with the relevant register
6284   numbers.  If X is a constant, return 0.  If X is a MEM, return 1 iff IN
6285   contains a MEM (we don't bother checking for memory addresses that can't
6286   conflict because we expect this to be a rare case.
6287
6288   This function is similar to reg_overlap_mentioned_p in rtlanal.c except
6289   that we look at equivalences for pseudos that didn't get hard registers.  */
6290
6291int
6292reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (rtx x, rtx in)
6293{
6294  int regno, endregno;
6295
6296  /* Overly conservative.  */
6297  if (GET_CODE (x) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6298      || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == 'a')
6299    x = XEXP (x, 0);
6300
6301  /* If either argument is a constant, then modifying X can not affect IN.  */
6302  if (CONSTANT_P (x) || CONSTANT_P (in))
6303    return 0;
6304  else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
6305    {
6306      regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
6307      if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6308	regno += subreg_regno_offset (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)),
6309				      GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
6310				      SUBREG_BYTE (x),
6311				      GET_MODE (x));
6312    }
6313  else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
6314    {
6315      regno = REGNO (x);
6316
6317      /* If this is a pseudo, it must not have been assigned a hard register.
6318	 Therefore, it must either be in memory or be a constant.  */
6319
6320      if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6321	{
6322	  if (reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno])
6323	    return refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (in);
6324	  else if (reg_equiv_constant[regno])
6325	    return 0;
6326	  abort ();
6327	}
6328    }
6329  else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
6330    return refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (in);
6331  else if (GET_CODE (x) == SCRATCH || GET_CODE (x) == PC
6332	   || GET_CODE (x) == CC0)
6333    return reg_mentioned_p (x, in);
6334  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS)
6335    {
6336      /* We actually want to know if X is mentioned somewhere inside IN.
6337	 We must not say that (plus (sp) (const_int 124)) is in
6338	 (plus (sp) (const_int 64)), since that can lead to incorrect reload
6339	 allocation when spuriously changing a RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS
6340	 into a RELOAD_OTHER on behalf of another RELOAD_OTHER.  */
6341      while (GET_CODE (in) == MEM)
6342	in = XEXP (in, 0);
6343      if (GET_CODE (in) == REG)
6344	return 0;
6345      else if (GET_CODE (in) == PLUS)
6346	return (reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (x, XEXP (in, 0))
6347		|| reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (x, XEXP (in, 1)));
6348      else return (reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (x, 0), in)
6349		   || reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (x, 1), in));
6350    }
6351  else
6352    abort ();
6353
6354  endregno = regno + (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6355		      ? HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)) : 1);
6356
6357  return refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (regno, endregno, in, (rtx*) 0);
6358}
6359
6360/* Return nonzero if anything in X contains a MEM.  Look also for pseudo
6361   registers.  */
6362
6363int
6364refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (rtx x)
6365{
6366  const char *fmt;
6367  int i;
6368
6369  if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
6370    return 1;
6371
6372  if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
6373    return (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6374	    && reg_equiv_memory_loc[REGNO (x)]);
6375
6376  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
6377  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6378    if (fmt[i] == 'e'
6379	&& (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == MEM
6380	    || refers_to_mem_for_reload_p (XEXP (x, i))))
6381      return 1;
6382
6383  return 0;
6384}
6385
6386/* Check the insns before INSN to see if there is a suitable register
6387   containing the same value as GOAL.
6388   If OTHER is -1, look for a register in class CLASS.
6389   Otherwise, just see if register number OTHER shares GOAL's value.
6390
6391   Return an rtx for the register found, or zero if none is found.
6392
6393   If RELOAD_REG_P is (short *)1,
6394   we reject any hard reg that appears in reload_reg_rtx
6395   because such a hard reg is also needed coming into this insn.
6396
6397   If RELOAD_REG_P is any other nonzero value,
6398   it is a vector indexed by hard reg number
6399   and we reject any hard reg whose element in the vector is nonnegative
6400   as well as any that appears in reload_reg_rtx.
6401
6402   If GOAL is zero, then GOALREG is a register number; we look
6403   for an equivalent for that register.
6404
6405   MODE is the machine mode of the value we want an equivalence for.
6406   If GOAL is nonzero and not VOIDmode, then it must have mode MODE.
6407
6408   This function is used by jump.c as well as in the reload pass.
6409
6410   If GOAL is the sum of the stack pointer and a constant, we treat it
6411   as if it were a constant except that sp is required to be unchanging.  */
6412
6413rtx
6414find_equiv_reg (rtx goal, rtx insn, enum reg_class class, int other,
6415		short *reload_reg_p, int goalreg, enum machine_mode mode)
6416{
6417  rtx p = insn;
6418  rtx goaltry, valtry, value, where;
6419  rtx pat;
6420  int regno = -1;
6421  int valueno;
6422  int goal_mem = 0;
6423  int goal_const = 0;
6424  int goal_mem_addr_varies = 0;
6425  int need_stable_sp = 0;
6426  int nregs;
6427  int valuenregs;
6428  int num = 0;
6429
6430  if (goal == 0)
6431    regno = goalreg;
6432  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == REG)
6433    regno = REGNO (goal);
6434  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == MEM)
6435    {
6436      enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (XEXP (goal, 0));
6437      if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (goal))
6438	return 0;
6439      if (flag_float_store && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (goal)) == MODE_FLOAT)
6440	return 0;
6441      /* An address with side effects must be reexecuted.  */
6442      switch (code)
6443	{
6444	case POST_INC:
6445	case PRE_INC:
6446	case POST_DEC:
6447	case PRE_DEC:
6448	case POST_MODIFY:
6449	case PRE_MODIFY:
6450	  return 0;
6451	default:
6452	  break;
6453	}
6454      goal_mem = 1;
6455    }
6456  else if (CONSTANT_P (goal))
6457    goal_const = 1;
6458  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == PLUS
6459	   && XEXP (goal, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
6460	   && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (goal, 1)))
6461    goal_const = need_stable_sp = 1;
6462  else if (GET_CODE (goal) == PLUS
6463	   && XEXP (goal, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx
6464	   && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (goal, 1)))
6465    goal_const = 1;
6466  else
6467    return 0;
6468
6469  num = 0;
6470  /* Scan insns back from INSN, looking for one that copies
6471     a value into or out of GOAL.
6472     Stop and give up if we reach a label.  */
6473
6474  while (1)
6475    {
6476      p = PREV_INSN (p);
6477      num++;
6478      if (p == 0 || GET_CODE (p) == CODE_LABEL
6479	  || num > PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_RELOAD_SEARCH_INSNS))
6480	return 0;
6481
6482      if (GET_CODE (p) == INSN
6483	  /* If we don't want spill regs ...  */
6484	  && (! (reload_reg_p != 0
6485		 && reload_reg_p != (short *) (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1)
6486	      /* ... then ignore insns introduced by reload; they aren't
6487		 useful and can cause results in reload_as_needed to be
6488		 different from what they were when calculating the need for
6489		 spills.  If we notice an input-reload insn here, we will
6490		 reject it below, but it might hide a usable equivalent.
6491		 That makes bad code.  It may even abort: perhaps no reg was
6492		 spilled for this insn because it was assumed we would find
6493		 that equivalent.  */
6494	      || INSN_UID (p) < reload_first_uid))
6495	{
6496	  rtx tem;
6497	  pat = single_set (p);
6498
6499	  /* First check for something that sets some reg equal to GOAL.  */
6500	  if (pat != 0
6501	      && ((regno >= 0
6502		   && true_regnum (SET_SRC (pat)) == regno
6503		   && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0)
6504		  ||
6505		  (regno >= 0
6506		   && true_regnum (SET_DEST (pat)) == regno
6507		   && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_SRC (pat))) >= 0)
6508		  ||
6509		  (goal_const && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (pat), goal)
6510		   /* When looking for stack pointer + const,
6511		      make sure we don't use a stack adjust.  */
6512		   && !reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (SET_DEST (pat), goal)
6513		   && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0)
6514		  || (goal_mem
6515		      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0
6516		      && rtx_renumbered_equal_p (goal, SET_SRC (pat)))
6517		  || (goal_mem
6518		      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry = SET_SRC (pat))) >= 0
6519		      && rtx_renumbered_equal_p (goal, SET_DEST (pat)))
6520		  /* If we are looking for a constant,
6521		     and something equivalent to that constant was copied
6522		     into a reg, we can use that reg.  */
6523		  || (goal_const && REG_NOTES (p) != 0
6524		      && (tem = find_reg_note (p, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX))
6525		      && ((rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), goal)
6526			   && (valueno
6527			       = true_regnum (valtry = SET_DEST (pat))) >= 0)
6528			  || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) == REG
6529			      && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CONST_DOUBLE
6530			      && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (tem, 0)))
6531				  == MODE_FLOAT)
6532			      && GET_CODE (goal) == CONST_INT
6533			      && 0 != (goaltry
6534				       = operand_subword (XEXP (tem, 0), 0, 0,
6535							  VOIDmode))
6536			      && rtx_equal_p (goal, goaltry)
6537			      && (valtry
6538				  = operand_subword (SET_DEST (pat), 0, 0,
6539						     VOIDmode))
6540			      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry)) >= 0)))
6541		  || (goal_const && (tem = find_reg_note (p, REG_EQUIV,
6542							  NULL_RTX))
6543		      && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) == REG
6544		      && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CONST_DOUBLE
6545		      && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (tem, 0)))
6546			  == MODE_FLOAT)
6547		      && GET_CODE (goal) == CONST_INT
6548		      && 0 != (goaltry = operand_subword (XEXP (tem, 0), 1, 0,
6549							  VOIDmode))
6550		      && rtx_equal_p (goal, goaltry)
6551		      && (valtry
6552			  = operand_subword (SET_DEST (pat), 1, 0, VOIDmode))
6553		      && (valueno = true_regnum (valtry)) >= 0)))
6554	    {
6555	      if (other >= 0)
6556		{
6557		  if (valueno != other)
6558		    continue;
6559		}
6560	      else if ((unsigned) valueno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6561		continue;
6562	      else
6563		{
6564		  int i;
6565
6566		  for (i = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6567		    if (! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (reg_class_contents[(int) class],
6568					     valueno + i))
6569		      break;
6570		  if (i >= 0)
6571		    continue;
6572		}
6573	      value = valtry;
6574	      where = p;
6575	      break;
6576	    }
6577	}
6578    }
6579
6580  /* We found a previous insn copying GOAL into a suitable other reg VALUE
6581     (or copying VALUE into GOAL, if GOAL is also a register).
6582     Now verify that VALUE is really valid.  */
6583
6584  /* VALUENO is the register number of VALUE; a hard register.  */
6585
6586  /* Don't try to re-use something that is killed in this insn.  We want
6587     to be able to trust REG_UNUSED notes.  */
6588  if (REG_NOTES (where) != 0 && find_reg_note (where, REG_UNUSED, value))
6589    return 0;
6590
6591  /* If we propose to get the value from the stack pointer or if GOAL is
6592     a MEM based on the stack pointer, we need a stable SP.  */
6593  if (valueno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
6594      || (goal_mem && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (stack_pointer_rtx,
6595							  goal)))
6596    need_stable_sp = 1;
6597
6598  /* Reject VALUE if the copy-insn moved the wrong sort of datum.  */
6599  if (GET_MODE (value) != mode)
6600    return 0;
6601
6602  /* Reject VALUE if it was loaded from GOAL
6603     and is also a register that appears in the address of GOAL.  */
6604
6605  if (goal_mem && value == SET_DEST (single_set (where))
6606      && refers_to_regno_for_reload_p (valueno,
6607				       (valueno
6608					+ HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode)),
6609				       goal, (rtx*) 0))
6610    return 0;
6611
6612  /* Reject registers that overlap GOAL.  */
6613
6614  if (!goal_mem && !goal_const
6615      && regno + (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode) > valueno
6616      && regno < valueno + (int) HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode))
6617    return 0;
6618
6619  nregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode);
6620  valuenregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (valueno, mode);
6621
6622  /* Reject VALUE if it is one of the regs reserved for reloads.
6623     Reload1 knows how to reuse them anyway, and it would get
6624     confused if we allocated one without its knowledge.
6625     (Now that insns introduced by reload are ignored above,
6626     this case shouldn't happen, but I'm not positive.)  */
6627
6628  if (reload_reg_p != 0 && reload_reg_p != (short *) (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1)
6629    {
6630      int i;
6631      for (i = 0; i < valuenregs; ++i)
6632	if (reload_reg_p[valueno + i] >= 0)
6633	  return 0;
6634    }
6635
6636  /* Reject VALUE if it is a register being used for an input reload
6637     even if it is not one of those reserved.  */
6638
6639  if (reload_reg_p != 0)
6640    {
6641      int i;
6642      for (i = 0; i < n_reloads; i++)
6643	if (rld[i].reg_rtx != 0 && rld[i].in)
6644	  {
6645	    int regno1 = REGNO (rld[i].reg_rtx);
6646	    int nregs1 = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno1,
6647					   GET_MODE (rld[i].reg_rtx));
6648	    if (regno1 < valueno + valuenregs
6649		&& regno1 + nregs1 > valueno)
6650	      return 0;
6651	  }
6652    }
6653
6654  if (goal_mem)
6655    /* We must treat frame pointer as varying here,
6656       since it can vary--in a nonlocal goto as generated by expand_goto.  */
6657    goal_mem_addr_varies = !CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (goal, 0));
6658
6659  /* Now verify that the values of GOAL and VALUE remain unaltered
6660     until INSN is reached.  */
6661
6662  p = insn;
6663  while (1)
6664    {
6665      p = PREV_INSN (p);
6666      if (p == where)
6667	return value;
6668
6669      /* Don't trust the conversion past a function call
6670	 if either of the two is in a call-clobbered register, or memory.  */
6671      if (GET_CODE (p) == CALL_INSN)
6672	{
6673	  int i;
6674
6675	  if (goal_mem || need_stable_sp)
6676	    return 0;
6677
6678	  if (regno >= 0 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6679	    for (i = 0; i < nregs; ++i)
6680	      if (call_used_regs[regno + i])
6681		return 0;
6682
6683	  if (valueno >= 0 && valueno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6684	    for (i = 0; i < valuenregs; ++i)
6685	      if (call_used_regs[valueno + i])
6686		return 0;
6687#ifdef NON_SAVING_SETJMP
6688	  if (NON_SAVING_SETJMP && find_reg_note (p, REG_SETJMP, NULL))
6689	    return 0;
6690#endif
6691	}
6692
6693      if (INSN_P (p))
6694	{
6695	  pat = PATTERN (p);
6696
6697	  /* Watch out for unspec_volatile, and volatile asms.  */
6698	  if (volatile_insn_p (pat))
6699	    return 0;
6700
6701	  /* If this insn P stores in either GOAL or VALUE, return 0.
6702	     If GOAL is a memory ref and this insn writes memory, return 0.
6703	     If GOAL is a memory ref and its address is not constant,
6704	     and this insn P changes a register used in GOAL, return 0.  */
6705
6706	  if (GET_CODE (pat) == COND_EXEC)
6707	    pat = COND_EXEC_CODE (pat);
6708	  if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET || GET_CODE (pat) == CLOBBER)
6709	    {
6710	      rtx dest = SET_DEST (pat);
6711	      while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6712		     || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6713		     || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6714		     || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6715		dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6716	      if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
6717		{
6718		  int xregno = REGNO (dest);
6719		  int xnregs;
6720		  if (REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6721		    xnregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (xregno, GET_MODE (dest));
6722		  else
6723		    xnregs = 1;
6724		  if (xregno < regno + nregs && xregno + xnregs > regno)
6725		    return 0;
6726		  if (xregno < valueno + valuenregs
6727		      && xregno + xnregs > valueno)
6728		    return 0;
6729		  if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6730		      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (dest, goal))
6731		    return 0;
6732		  if (xregno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM && need_stable_sp)
6733		    return 0;
6734		}
6735	      else if (goal_mem && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6736		       && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6737		return 0;
6738	      else if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM && regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6739		       && reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0)
6740		return 0;
6741	      else if (need_stable_sp && push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6742		return 0;
6743	    }
6744	  else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
6745	    {
6746	      int i;
6747	      for (i = XVECLEN (pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6748		{
6749		  rtx v1 = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
6750		  if (GET_CODE (v1) == COND_EXEC)
6751		    v1 = COND_EXEC_CODE (v1);
6752		  if (GET_CODE (v1) == SET || GET_CODE (v1) == CLOBBER)
6753		    {
6754		      rtx dest = SET_DEST (v1);
6755		      while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6756			     || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6757			     || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6758			     || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6759			dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6760		      if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
6761			{
6762			  int xregno = REGNO (dest);
6763			  int xnregs;
6764			  if (REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6765			    xnregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (xregno, GET_MODE (dest));
6766			  else
6767			    xnregs = 1;
6768			  if (xregno < regno + nregs
6769			      && xregno + xnregs > regno)
6770			    return 0;
6771			  if (xregno < valueno + valuenregs
6772			      && xregno + xnregs > valueno)
6773			    return 0;
6774			  if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6775			      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (dest,
6776								     goal))
6777			    return 0;
6778			  if (xregno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM && need_stable_sp)
6779			    return 0;
6780			}
6781		      else if (goal_mem && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6782			       && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6783			return 0;
6784		      else if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM && regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6785			       && reg_equiv_memory_loc[regno] != 0)
6786			return 0;
6787		      else if (need_stable_sp
6788			       && push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6789			return 0;
6790		    }
6791		}
6792	    }
6793
6794	  if (GET_CODE (p) == CALL_INSN && CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (p))
6795	    {
6796	      rtx link;
6797
6798	      for (link = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (p); XEXP (link, 1) != 0;
6799		   link = XEXP (link, 1))
6800		{
6801		  pat = XEXP (link, 0);
6802		  if (GET_CODE (pat) == CLOBBER)
6803		    {
6804		      rtx dest = SET_DEST (pat);
6805
6806		      if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
6807			{
6808			  int xregno = REGNO (dest);
6809			  int xnregs
6810			    = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (xregno, GET_MODE (dest));
6811
6812			  if (xregno < regno + nregs
6813			      && xregno + xnregs > regno)
6814			    return 0;
6815			  else if (xregno < valueno + valuenregs
6816				   && xregno + xnregs > valueno)
6817			    return 0;
6818			  else if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6819				   && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (dest,
6820								     goal))
6821			    return 0;
6822			}
6823
6824		      else if (goal_mem && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6825			       && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6826			return 0;
6827		      else if (need_stable_sp
6828			       && push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
6829			return 0;
6830		    }
6831		}
6832	    }
6833
6834#ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
6835	  /* If this insn auto-increments or auto-decrements
6836	     either regno or valueno, return 0 now.
6837	     If GOAL is a memory ref and its address is not constant,
6838	     and this insn P increments a register used in GOAL, return 0.  */
6839	  {
6840	    rtx link;
6841
6842	    for (link = REG_NOTES (p); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
6843	      if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
6844		  && GET_CODE (XEXP (link, 0)) == REG)
6845		{
6846		  int incno = REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
6847		  if (incno < regno + nregs && incno >= regno)
6848		    return 0;
6849		  if (incno < valueno + valuenregs && incno >= valueno)
6850		    return 0;
6851		  if (goal_mem_addr_varies
6852		      && reg_overlap_mentioned_for_reload_p (XEXP (link, 0),
6853							     goal))
6854		    return 0;
6855		}
6856	  }
6857#endif
6858	}
6859    }
6860}
6861
6862/* Find a place where INCED appears in an increment or decrement operator
6863   within X, and return the amount INCED is incremented or decremented by.
6864   The value is always positive.  */
6865
6866static int
6867find_inc_amount (rtx x, rtx inced)
6868{
6869  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
6870  const char *fmt;
6871  int i;
6872
6873  if (code == MEM)
6874    {
6875      rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0);
6876      if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC
6877	   || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC
6878	   || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
6879	   || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
6880	  && XEXP (addr, 0) == inced)
6881	return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
6882      else if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_MODIFY
6883		|| GET_CODE (addr) == POST_MODIFY)
6884	       && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == PLUS
6885	       && XEXP (addr, 0) == XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 0)
6886	       && XEXP (addr, 0) == inced
6887	       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT)
6888	{
6889	  i = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 1), 1));
6890	  return i < 0 ? -i : i;
6891	}
6892    }
6893
6894  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6895  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6896    {
6897      if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6898	{
6899	  int tem = find_inc_amount (XEXP (x, i), inced);
6900	  if (tem != 0)
6901	    return tem;
6902	}
6903      if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6904	{
6905	  int j;
6906	  for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6907	    {
6908	      int tem = find_inc_amount (XVECEXP (x, i, j), inced);
6909	      if (tem != 0)
6910		return tem;
6911	    }
6912	}
6913    }
6914
6915  return 0;
6916}
6917
6918/* Return 1 if register REGNO is the subject of a clobber in insn INSN.
6919   If SETS is nonzero, also consider SETs.  */
6920
6921int
6922regno_clobbered_p (unsigned int regno, rtx insn, enum machine_mode mode,
6923		   int sets)
6924{
6925  unsigned int nregs = HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode);
6926  unsigned int endregno = regno + nregs;
6927
6928  if ((GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER
6929       || (sets && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET))
6930      && GET_CODE (XEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0)) == REG)
6931    {
6932      unsigned int test = REGNO (XEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0));
6933
6934      return test >= regno && test < endregno;
6935    }
6936
6937  if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6938    {
6939      int i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1;
6940
6941      for (; i >= 0; i--)
6942	{
6943	  rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
6944	  if ((GET_CODE (elt) == CLOBBER
6945	       || (sets && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET))
6946	      && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt, 0)) == REG)
6947	    {
6948	      unsigned int test = REGNO (XEXP (elt, 0));
6949
6950	      if (test >= regno && test < endregno)
6951		return 1;
6952	    }
6953	}
6954    }
6955
6956  return 0;
6957}
6958
6959/* Find the low part, with mode MODE, of a hard regno RELOADREG.  */
6960rtx
6961reload_adjust_reg_for_mode (rtx reloadreg, enum machine_mode mode)
6962{
6963  int regno;
6964
6965  if (GET_MODE (reloadreg) == mode)
6966    return reloadreg;
6967
6968  regno = REGNO (reloadreg);
6969
6970  if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
6971    regno += HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (reloadreg))
6972      - HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, mode);
6973
6974  return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
6975}
6976
6977static const char *const reload_when_needed_name[] =
6978{
6979  "RELOAD_FOR_INPUT",
6980  "RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT",
6981  "RELOAD_FOR_INSN",
6982  "RELOAD_FOR_INPUT_ADDRESS",
6983  "RELOAD_FOR_INPADDR_ADDRESS",
6984  "RELOAD_FOR_OUTPUT_ADDRESS",
6985  "RELOAD_FOR_OUTADDR_ADDRESS",
6986  "RELOAD_FOR_OPERAND_ADDRESS",
6987  "RELOAD_FOR_OPADDR_ADDR",
6988  "RELOAD_OTHER",
6989  "RELOAD_FOR_OTHER_ADDRESS"
6990};
6991
6992static const char * const reg_class_names[] = REG_CLASS_NAMES;
6993
6994/* These functions are used to print the variables set by 'find_reloads' */
6995
6996void
6997debug_reload_to_stream (FILE *f)
6998{
6999  int r;
7000  const char *prefix;
7001
7002  if (! f)
7003    f = stderr;
7004  for (r = 0; r < n_reloads; r++)
7005    {
7006      fprintf (f, "Reload %d: ", r);
7007
7008      if (rld[r].in != 0)
7009	{
7010	  fprintf (f, "reload_in (%s) = ",
7011		   GET_MODE_NAME (rld[r].inmode));
7012	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].in, 24);
7013	  fprintf (f, "\n\t");
7014	}
7015
7016      if (rld[r].out != 0)
7017	{
7018	  fprintf (f, "reload_out (%s) = ",
7019		   GET_MODE_NAME (rld[r].outmode));
7020	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].out, 24);
7021	  fprintf (f, "\n\t");
7022	}
7023
7024      fprintf (f, "%s, ", reg_class_names[(int) rld[r].class]);
7025
7026      fprintf (f, "%s (opnum = %d)",
7027	       reload_when_needed_name[(int) rld[r].when_needed],
7028	       rld[r].opnum);
7029
7030      if (rld[r].optional)
7031	fprintf (f, ", optional");
7032
7033      if (rld[r].nongroup)
7034	fprintf (f, ", nongroup");
7035
7036      if (rld[r].inc != 0)
7037	fprintf (f, ", inc by %d", rld[r].inc);
7038
7039      if (rld[r].nocombine)
7040	fprintf (f, ", can't combine");
7041
7042      if (rld[r].secondary_p)
7043	fprintf (f, ", secondary_reload_p");
7044
7045      if (rld[r].in_reg != 0)
7046	{
7047	  fprintf (f, "\n\treload_in_reg: ");
7048	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].in_reg, 24);
7049	}
7050
7051      if (rld[r].out_reg != 0)
7052	{
7053	  fprintf (f, "\n\treload_out_reg: ");
7054	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].out_reg, 24);
7055	}
7056
7057      if (rld[r].reg_rtx != 0)
7058	{
7059	  fprintf (f, "\n\treload_reg_rtx: ");
7060	  print_inline_rtx (f, rld[r].reg_rtx, 24);
7061	}
7062
7063      prefix = "\n\t";
7064      if (rld[r].secondary_in_reload != -1)
7065	{
7066	  fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_in_reload = %d",
7067		   prefix, rld[r].secondary_in_reload);
7068	  prefix = ", ";
7069	}
7070
7071      if (rld[r].secondary_out_reload != -1)
7072	fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_out_reload = %d\n",
7073		 prefix, rld[r].secondary_out_reload);
7074
7075      prefix = "\n\t";
7076      if (rld[r].secondary_in_icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
7077	{
7078	  fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_in_icode = %s", prefix,
7079		   insn_data[rld[r].secondary_in_icode].name);
7080	  prefix = ", ";
7081	}
7082
7083      if (rld[r].secondary_out_icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
7084	fprintf (f, "%ssecondary_out_icode = %s", prefix,
7085		 insn_data[rld[r].secondary_out_icode].name);
7086
7087      fprintf (f, "\n");
7088    }
7089}
7090
7091void
7092debug_reload (void)
7093{
7094  debug_reload_to_stream (stderr);
7095}
7096